Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login
to enable hyperlinks.
Changes In Branch core-8-6-branch Excluding Merge-Ins
This is equivalent to a diff from 32a9cba0 to 2d455ab8
|
2023-12-02
| ||
| 13:29 | Patch https://www.androwish.org/home/info/843e00e7fc400009 (fixes in tk's font rendering when using libxft) from Christian Werner. check-in: 4dc98988 user: fvogel tags: bug-c23f79ef96 | |
|
2023-12-01
| ||
| 10:11 | Merge 8.6 check-in: e78a3699 user: jan.nijtmans tags: core-8-branch | |
| 10:09 | http -> https (see [b54a9193f6]) Leaf check-in: 2d455ab8 user: jan.nijtmans tags: core-8-6-branch | |
|
2023-11-28
| ||
| 17:53 | Fix [900f23c6a8]: Potential problem in PNG parser check-in: 17378151 user: jan.nijtmans tags: core-8-6-branch | |
|
2022-02-07
| ||
| 08:26 | Fix [b54a9193f6]: broken HTTPS URL in ttk::style manual page check-in: 5e373590 user: jan.nijtmans tags: core-8-6-branch | |
|
2020-10-27
| ||
| 07:08 | Rename "trunk" to "main". Add "trunk" propagating tag for backwards compatibility check-in: 0f77b70d user: jan.nijtmans tags: trunk, main | |
| 01:25 | Merge 8.6 Closed-Leaf check-in: 32a9cba0 user: marc_culler tags: trunk | |
|
2020-10-26
| ||
| 08:58 | Merge 8.6 check-in: 88e0ce57 user: jan.nijtmans tags: trunk | |
|
2020-10-25
| ||
| 20:11 | Adjustment for Sierra. Closed-Leaf check-in: 77a51c32 user: culler tags: bug-5cc72e002c | |
Changes to .fossil-settings/encoding-glob.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | win/buildall.vc.bat win/makefile.vc win/rules-ext.vc win/rules.vc win/targets.vc win/rc/*.bmp win/rc/*.cur win/rc/*.ico win/rc/*.rc | > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | win/buildall.vc.bat win/makefile.vc win/mkd.bat win/rmd.bat win/rules-ext.vc win/rules.vc win/targets.vc win/rc/*.bmp win/rc/*.cur win/rc/*.ico win/rc/*.rc |
Changes to .fossil-settings/ignore-glob.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | */Makefile */autom4te.cache */config.cache */config.log */config.status */tkConfig.sh */wish* | | | > > > | 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | */Makefile */autom4te.cache */config.cache */config.log */config.status */tkConfig.sh */wish* */tktest */versions.vc */version.vc */libtk.vfs */libtk*.zip */tkUuid.h doc/man.macros html macosx/configure win/Debug* win/Release* win/*.manifest win/nmhlp-out.txt win/nmakehlp.out unix/tk.pc unix/Tk-Info.plist unix/Wish-Info.plist unix/Credits.html |
Added .github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE.md.
> > > | 1 2 3 | Important Note ========== Please do not file issues with Tk on Github. They are unlikely to be noticed in a timely fashion. Tk issues are hosted in the [tk fossil repository on core.tcl-lang.org](https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/tktnew); please post them there. |
Added .github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md.
> > > | 1 2 3 | Important Note ========== Please do not file pull requests with Tk on Github. They are unlikely to be noticed in a timely fashion. Tk issues (including patches) are hosted in the [tk fossil repository on core.tcl-lang.org](https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/tktnew); please post them there. |
Added .github/workflows/linux-build.yml.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 |
name: Linux
on:
push:
branches:
- "main"
- "core-8-6-branch"
tags:
- "core-**"
permissions:
contents: read
defaults:
run:
shell: bash
working-directory: tk/unix
env:
ERROR_ON_FAILURES: 1
jobs:
build:
runs-on: ubuntu-22.04
strategy:
matrix:
compiler:
- "gcc"
- "clang"
symbols:
- "no"
- "mem"
disables:
- ""
- "--disable-shared"
- "--disable-xft"
- "--disable-xss"
steps:
- name: Checkout
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Checkout Tcl
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }})
run: |
sudo apt-get install tcl8.6-dev libxss-dev libxft-dev
mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c
echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT --with-tcl=/usr/lib/tcl8.6" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "CC=$COMPILER" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "TOOL_DIR=$(cd tcl/tools;pwd)" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "BUILD_CONFIG_ID=$OPTS" >> $GITHUB_ENV
working-directory: "."
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }} ${{ matrix.disables }}
COMPILER: ${{ matrix.compiler }}
OPTS: ${{ matrix.compiler }}-${{ matrix.symbols }}${{ matrix.disables }}
- name: Configure (symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }} opts=${{ matrix.disables }})
run: |
./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Configure"
exit 1
}
- name: Build
run: |
make binaries libraries || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Build Test Harness
run: |
make tktest || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Test-Drive Installation
run: |
make install || {
echo "::error::Failure during Install"
exit 1
}
- name: Create Distribution Package
run: |
make dist || {
echo "::error::Failure during Distribute"
exit 1
}
- name: Convert Documentation to HTML
run: |
make html-tk TOOL_DIR=$TOOL_DIR || {
echo "::error::Failure during Distribute"
exit 1
}
- name: Discover Version ID
if: ${{ env.BUILD_CONFIG_ID == 'gcc-no' }}
run: |
cd /tmp/dist
echo "VERSION=`ls -d tk* | sed 's/tk//'`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
- name: Upload Source Distribution
if: ${{ env.BUILD_CONFIG_ID == 'gcc-no' }}
uses: actions/upload-artifact@v3
with:
name: Tk ${{ env.VERSION }} Source distribution (snapshot)
path: |
/tmp/dist/tk*
!/tmp/dist/tk*/html/**
- name: Upload Documentation Distribution
if: ${{ env.BUILD_CONFIG_ID == 'gcc-no' }}
uses: actions/upload-artifact@v3
with:
name: Tk ${{ env.VERSION }} HTML documentation (snapshot)
path: /tmp/dist/tk*/html
test:
runs-on: ubuntu-20.04
strategy:
matrix:
compiler:
- "gcc"
symbols:
- "no"
- "mem"
steps:
- name: Checkout
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Setup Environment (compiler=${{ matrix.compiler }})
run: |
sudo apt-get install tcl8.6-dev libxss-dev libxft-dev xvfb
mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
touch tk/doc/man.macros tk/generic/tkStubInit.c
echo "CFGOPT=$CFGOPT --with-tcl=/usr/lib/tcl8.6" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "CC=$COMPILER" >> $GITHUB_ENV
working-directory: "."
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }}
COMPILER: ${{ matrix.compiler }}
- name: Configure (symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }})
run: |
./configure $CFGOPT "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Configure"
exit 1
}
- name: Build
run: |
make binaries libraries tktest || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Run Tests
run: |
xvfb-run --auto-servernum make test-classic | tee out-classic.txt
xvfb-run --auto-servernum make test-ttk | tee out-ttk.txt
grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
timeout-minutes: 15
|
Added .github/workflows/mac-build.yml.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 |
name: macOS
on:
push:
branches:
- "main"
- "core-8-6-branch"
tags:
- "core-**"
permissions:
contents: read
env:
ERROR_ON_FAILURES: 1
jobs:
xcode:
runs-on: macos-11
defaults:
run:
shell: bash
working-directory: tk/macosx
steps:
- name: Check out Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Check out Tcl
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Prepare checked out repositories
run: |
touch tk/generic/tkStubInit.c
mkdir build
echo "BUILD_DIR=`cd build && pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
echo "DESTDIR=`cd build && pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
working-directory: .
- name: Build Tcl
run: |
make all
working-directory: tcl/macosx
- name: Build
run: |
make all install || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Run Tests
run: |
make test | tee out.txt
nmatches=$( grep -c "Failed 0" out.txt )
if [ $nmatches -lt 4 ]
then
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
fi
timeout-minutes: 30
clang:
runs-on: macos-11
strategy:
matrix:
symbols:
- 'no'
- 'mem'
options:
- '--enable-aqua'
- '--disable-aqua'
defaults:
run:
shell: bash
working-directory: tk/unix
steps:
- name: Check out Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Check out Tcl
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Prepare checked out repositories
env:
SET_DISPLAY: ${{ contains(matrix.options, '--disable-aqua') }}
run: |
touch ../generic/tkStubInit.c ../doc/man.macros
mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
echo "USE_XVFB=$SET_DISPLAY" >> $GITHUB_ENV
- name: Add X11 (if required)
if: ${{ env.USE_XVFB == 'true' }}
run: |
brew install --cask xquartz
sudo /opt/X11/libexec/privileged_startx || true
working-directory: .
- name: Build Tcl
# Note that macOS is always a 64 bit platform
run: |
./configure --enable-64bit ${CFGOPT} "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Tcl Configure"
exit 1
}
make all || {
echo "::error::Failure during Tcl Build"
exit 1
}
make install || {
echo "::error::Failure during Tcl Install"
exit 1
}
working-directory: tcl/unix
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }}
- name: Configure (symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }} ${{matrix.options }})
# Note that macOS is always a 64 bit platform
run: |
./configure --enable-64bit ${CFGOPT} "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" --disable-xft || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Configure"
exit 1
}
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }} ${{matrix.options }}
- name: Build
run: |
make binaries libraries tktest || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Run Tests
run: |
if [ $USE_XVFB == true ]; then
function runXvfb {
PATH=$PATH:/opt/X11/bin
Xvfb $1 &
XVFB_PID=$!
echo Launched Xvfb $1 as process $XVFB_PID >&2
trap "echo killing process $XVFB_PID... >&2; kill $XVFB_PID" 0
export DISPLAY=$1
sleep 2
}
else
function runXvfb {
echo Xvfb not used, this is a --enable-aqua build
}
fi
( runXvfb :0; make test-classic; exit $? ) | tee out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test (classic)"
exit 1
}
( runXvfb :0; make test-ttk; exit $? ) | tee out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test (ttk)"
exit 1
}
cat out-classic.txt | grep -q "Failed 0" || {
echo "::error::Failure in classic test results"
exit 1
}
cat out-ttk.txt | grep -q "Failed 0" || {
echo "::error::Failure in ttk test results"
exit 1
}
timeout-minutes: 15
- name: Carry out trial installation
run: |
make install || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Install"
exit 1
}
|
Added .github/workflows/win-build.yml.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 |
name: Windows
on:
push:
branches:
- "main"
- "core-8-6-branch"
tags:
- "core-**"
permissions:
contents: read
env:
ERROR_ON_FAILURES: 1
jobs:
msvc:
runs-on: windows-2022
defaults:
run:
shell: powershell
working-directory: tk/win
# Using powershell means we need to explicitly stop on failure
strategy:
matrix:
symbols:
- "none"
- "symbols"
steps:
- name: Checkout Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
path: tk
- name: Checkout Tcl
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Init MSVC
uses: ilammy/msvc-dev-cmd@v1
- name: Make Install Location
working-directory: tcl
run: |
echo "TCLDIR=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
cd ..
mkdir install
cd install
echo "INSTALLDIR=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
- name: Build Tcl (OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc release install OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
working-directory: tcl/win
- name: Build Tk (OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc all OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
- name: Build Test Harness (OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc tktest OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
- name: Run Tk Tests (OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }})
run: |
nmake -f makefile.vc test-classic OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }} | tee out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
nmake -f makefile.vc test-ttk OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }} | tee out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
env:
CI_BUILD_WITH_MSVC: 1
shell: bash
timeout-minutes: 15
- name: Build Help (OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc htmlhelp OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
- name: Install (OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }})
run: |
&nmake -f makefile.vc install OPTS=${{ matrix.symbols }}
if ($lastexitcode -ne 0) {
throw "nmake exit code: $lastexitcode"
}
gcc:
runs-on: windows-2019
defaults:
run:
shell: msys2 {0}
working-directory: win
strategy:
matrix:
symbols:
- "no"
- "mem"
- "all"
steps:
- name: Install MSYS2
uses: msys2/setup-msys2@v2
with:
msystem: MINGW64
install: git mingw-w64-x86_64-toolchain make
- name: Checkout Tk
uses: actions/checkout@v4
- name: Checkout Tcl
uses: actions/checkout@v4
with:
repository: tcltk/tcl
ref: core-8-6-branch
path: tcl
- name: Prepare
run: |
touch tkStubInit.c
touch "${HOME}/forWinDialog-5.12.7"
mkdir "${HOME}/install_dir"
echo "INSTALL_DIR=${HOME}/install_dir" >> $GITHUB_ENV
working-directory: generic
- name: Configure and Build Tcl
run: |
./configure ${CFGOPT} "--prefix=$INSTALL_DIR" || {
cat config.log
echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Configure"
exit 1
}
make all install || {
echo "::warning::Failure during Tcl Build"
exit 1
}
echo "TCL_CONFIG_PATH=`pwd`" >> $GITHUB_ENV
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-64bit --enable-symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }}
working-directory: tcl/win
- name: Configure Tk (symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }})
run: |
./configure ${CFGOPT} "--prefix=$HOME/INSTALL_DIR" "--with-tcl=$TCL_CONFIG_PATH" || {
cat config.log
echo "::error::Failure during Configure"
exit 1
}
env:
CFGOPT: --enable-64bit --enable-symbols=${{ matrix.symbols }}
- name: Build Tk
run: |
make all tktest || {
echo "::error::Failure during Build"
exit 1
}
- name: Run Tk Tests
run: |
make test-classic | tee out-classic.txt
make test-ttk | tee out-ttk.txt
grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt || {
echo "::error::Failure during Test"
exit 1
}
timeout-minutes: 15
|
Changes to .gitignore.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | *.res *.sl *.so .fslckout Makefile Tk-Info.plist Wish-Info.plist autom4te.cache config.cache config.log config.status config.status.lineno html manifest.uuid _FOSSIL_ */tkConfig.sh */wish* | > > | | | > | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 | *.res *.sl *.so .fslckout Makefile Tk-Info.plist Wish-Info.plist Credits.html autom4te.cache config.cache config.log config.status config.status.lineno doc/man.macros html manifest.uuid _FOSSIL_ */tkConfig.sh */wish* */tktest */versions.vc */version.vc */libtk.vfs */libtk*.zip */tkUuid.h libtommath/bn.ilg libtommath/bn.ind libtommath/pretty.build libtommath/tommath.src libtommath/*.log libtommath/*.pdf libtommath/*.pl |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to .project.
1 2 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <projectDescription> | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <projectDescription> <name>tk8.6</name> <comment></comment> <projects> </projects> <buildSpec> </buildSpec> <natures> </natures> </projectDescription> |
Changes to .travis.yml.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 |
- gcc-mingw-w64
- gcc-mingw-w64-base
- gcc-mingw-w64-i686
- gcc-mingw-w64-x86-64
- gcc-multilib
- tcl8.6-dev
- libx11-dev
- xvfb
homebrew:
packages:
- tcl-tk
| > | | < < < < < < < < < < | 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 |
- gcc-mingw-w64
- gcc-mingw-w64-base
- gcc-mingw-w64-i686
- gcc-mingw-w64-x86-64
- gcc-multilib
- tcl8.6-dev
- libx11-dev
- libxss-dev
- xvfb
homebrew:
packages:
- tcl-tk
# casks:
# - xquartz
jobs:
include:
# Testing on Linux GCC
- name: "Linux/GCC/Shared"
os: linux
dist: focal
services:
- xvfb
compiler: gcc
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
script: &x11gui
- make binaries libraries tktest
- make install
- make test-classic >out-classic.txt
- cat out-classic.txt
- grep -q "Failed 0" out-classic.txt
- make test-ttk >out-ttk.txt
- cat out-ttk.txt
- grep -q "Failed 0" out-ttk.txt
- name: "Linux/GCC/Shared/no-xft"
os: linux
dist: focal
services:
- xvfb
compiler: gcc
env:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 |
- name: "Linux/GCC/Debug"
os: linux
dist: focal
compiler: gcc
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--enable-symbols"
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 |
- name: "Linux/GCC/Debug"
os: linux
dist: focal
compiler: gcc
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--enable-symbols"
# Newer/Older versions of GCC
- name: "Linux/GCC 10/Shared"
os: linux
dist: focal
compiler: gcc-10
addons:
apt:
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
136 137 138 139 140 141 142 |
# Testing on Linux Clang
- name: "Linux/Clang/Shared"
os: linux
dist: focal
compiler: clang
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
| < < < < < < < | 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 |
# Testing on Linux Clang
- name: "Linux/Clang/Shared"
os: linux
dist: focal
compiler: clang
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- name: "Linux/Clang/Shared/no-xft"
os: linux
dist: focal
compiler: clang
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--disable-xft"
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
171 172 173 174 175 176 177 |
# Testing on Mac, various styles
- name: "macOS/Xcode 12/Shared"
os: osx
osx_image: xcode12
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--with-tcl=/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/lib --enable-aqua CFLAGS=-I/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/include"
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < | 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 |
# Testing on Mac, various styles
- name: "macOS/Xcode 12/Shared"
os: osx
osx_image: xcode12
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--with-tcl=/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/lib --enable-aqua CFLAGS=-I/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/include"
- name: "macOS/Xcode 12/Static"
os: osx
osx_image: xcode12
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--with-tcl=/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/lib --enable-aqua --disable-shared CFLAGS=-I/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/include"
- name: "macOS/Xcode 12/Debug"
os: osx
osx_image: xcode12
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--with-tcl=/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/lib --enable-aqua --enable-symbols CFLAGS=-I/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/include"
# - name: "macOS/Xcode 12/Shared/XQuartz"
# os: osx
# osx_image: xcode12
# env:
# - BUILD_DIR=unix
# - CFGOPT="--with-tcl=/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/lib --disable-corefoundation --x-includes=/opt/X11/include --x-libraries=/opt/X11/lib CFLAGS=-I/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/include"
# Older MacOS versions
- name: "macOS/Xcode 11/Shared"
os: osx
osx_image: xcode11.7
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--with-tcl=/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/lib --enable-aqua CFLAGS=-I/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/include CPPFLAGS=-mmacosx-version-min=10.14"
- name: "macOS/Xcode 10/Shared"
os: osx
osx_image: xcode10.3
addons:
homebrew:
packages:
- tcl-tk
update: true
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--with-tcl=/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/lib --enable-aqua CFLAGS=-I/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/include CPPFLAGS=-mmacosx-version-min=10.14"
- name: "macOS/Xcode 9/Shared"
os: osx
osx_image: xcode9.4
addons:
homebrew:
packages:
- tcl-tk
update: true
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
- CFGOPT="--with-tcl=/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/lib --enable-aqua CFLAGS=-I/usr/local/opt/tcl-tk/include CPPFLAGS=-mmacosx-version-min=10.13"
# Test on Windows with MSVC native
# - name: "Windows/MSVC/Shared"
# os: windows
# compiler: cl
# env: &vcenv
# - BUILD_DIR=win
# - VCDIR="/C/Program Files (x86)/Microsoft Visual Studio/2017/BuildTools/VC/Auxiliary/Build"
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 |
- name: "Linux: make dist"
os: linux
dist: focal
compiler: gcc
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
script:
- make dist
before_install:
- |-
case $TRAVIS_OS_NAME in
windows)
choco install -y magicsplat-tcl-tk
;;
esac
- cd ${BUILD_DIR}
install:
- mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
- ./configure ${CFGOPT} "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || (cat config.log && exit 1)
script:
| > | > > > > > > > > | 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 |
- name: "Linux: make dist"
os: linux
dist: focal
compiler: gcc
env:
- BUILD_DIR=unix
script:
- touch ../doc/man.macros
- make dist
before_install:
- |-
case $TRAVIS_OS_NAME in
windows)
choco install -y magicsplat-tcl-tk
;;
esac
- cd ${BUILD_DIR}
install:
- mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
- ./configure ${CFGOPT} "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || (cat config.log && exit 1)
script:
- make binaries libraries tktest
- make install
before_cache:
- |-
case $TRAVIS_OS_NAME in
osx)
brew cleanup
;;
esac
cache:
directories:
- $HOME/Library/Caches/Homebrew
- $HOME/AppData/Local/Temp/chocolatey
- $HOME/AppData/Local/Apps/Tcl86
|
Changes to ChangeLog.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
710 711 712 713 714 715 716 | * generic/tkObj.c (GetPixelsFromObjEx): [Bug 3431491]: Use a bit of type hackery to allow numbers to be interpreted as coordinates (most notably on a canvas) without reinterpreting via a string. 2011-10-27 Kevin B. Kenny <[email protected]> * generic/tkInt.h: [Bug 3410609]: Change the event mechanism | | | 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 | * generic/tkObj.c (GetPixelsFromObjEx): [Bug 3431491]: Use a bit of type hackery to allow numbers to be interpreted as coordinates (most notably on a canvas) without reinterpreting via a string. 2011-10-27 Kevin B. Kenny <[email protected]> * generic/tkInt.h: [Bug 3410609]: Change the event mechanism * unix/tkUnixEvent.c: for <KeyPress> events to use the keysym * unix/tkUnixKey.c: returned by XLookupString in preference to the one that appears in the raw X event at any level. This change allows binding to ISO_Level3_Shift-ed characters, composed characters, and similar beasts. KeyRelease events still work as they did before, as does Tk with input methods disabled. 2011-10-13 Jan Nijtmans <[email protected]> |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 | * library/demos/mclist.tcl: Added support for arrow indicators to show which way a column is being sorted. Corrected determination of which fonts to use for measurements. 2009-03-25 Jan Nijtmans <[email protected]> * doc/wish.1: Bring doc and demos in line with | | | 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 | * library/demos/mclist.tcl: Added support for arrow indicators to show which way a column is being sorted. Corrected determination of which fonts to use for measurements. 2009-03-25 Jan Nijtmans <[email protected]> * doc/wish.1: Bring doc and demos in line with * library/demos/hello: https://wiki.tcl-lang.org/page/exec+magic * library/demos/rmt * library/demos/square * library/demos/tcolor * library/demos/timer * library/demos/widget * win/tkWinMenu.c: Eliminate a few compiler warnings on mingw * win/ttkWinXPTheme.c: Spacing |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 | 2008-01-30 Donal K. Fellows <[email protected]> * doc/canvas.n, doc/listbox.n, doc/message.n: [Bug 1882495]: Fix erroneous listing of "standard" options. 2008-01-29 Joe English <[email protected]> | | | 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 5217 5218 5219 5220 5221 5222 5223 | 2008-01-30 Donal K. Fellows <[email protected]> * doc/canvas.n, doc/listbox.n, doc/message.n: [Bug 1882495]: Fix erroneous listing of "standard" options. 2008-01-29 Joe English <[email protected]> * library/treeview.tcl: Fix bug in Shift-ButtonPress-1 binding (error if no current focus item; reported on c.l.t.) 2008-01-29 Donal K. Fellows <[email protected]> * doc/ttk_*.n: [Bug 1876493]: Adjusted handling of the standard options part of the Ttk manual pages so that they are documented in the correct location. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to ChangeLog.2002.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 | Removed setting inputContext to null in Tk_MakeWindowExist as it was redundant. * unix/tkUnixWm.c (CreateWrapper): Removed redundat setting of inputContext to null. * win/Makefile.in: changed gdb and shell targets to properly build | | | 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 | Removed setting inputContext to null in Tk_MakeWindowExist as it was redundant. * unix/tkUnixWm.c (CreateWrapper): Removed redundat setting of inputContext to null. * win/Makefile.in: changed gdb and shell targets to properly build all binaries before running (otherwise an error often occured). 2002-03-28 David Gravereaux <[email protected]> * win/.cvsignore (new): * win/lamp.bmp (new): * win/makefile.vc: * win/nmakehlp.c (new): |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to ChangeLog.2004.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
807 808 809 810 811 812 813 | * doc/canvas.n: Add paragraph to make clearer what is going on with the default canvas origin. [Bug 956681] 2004-07-05 George Peter Staplin <[email protected]> * generic/tkEvent.c: TK_XIM_SPOT preprocessor usage was modified | | | 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 | * doc/canvas.n: Add paragraph to make clearer what is going on with the default canvas origin. [Bug 956681] 2004-07-05 George Peter Staplin <[email protected]> * generic/tkEvent.c: TK_XIM_SPOT preprocessor usage was modified slightly to fix a bug that occured when TK_XIM_SPOT was defined as 0. Thanks to Joe Mistachkin for reporting this bug. 2004-07-05 Donal K. Fellows <[email protected]> TIP#158 IMPLEMENTATION * tests/bind.test: Allow Win apps to distinguish keys |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 | * win/configure.in: * unix/tcl.m4: correct HP-UX ia64 --enable-64bit build flags 2003-02-13 Kevin Kenny <[email protected]> * doc/wish.n: Added language to describe the handling of the | | | 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 | * win/configure.in: * unix/tcl.m4: correct HP-UX ia64 --enable-64bit build flags 2003-02-13 Kevin Kenny <[email protected]> * doc/wish.n: Added language to describe the handling of the end-of-file character \u001a in script files. [Bug 685505] 2003-02-10 Jim Ingham <[email protected]> * macosx/tkMacOSXCursor.c (TkMacOSXInstallCursor): Set all theme cursors using SetThemeCursor or SetAnimatedThemeCursors. (TkGetCursorByName): Use the theme cursors for arrow, ibeam, etc. Allow animatedCursor{NUM} form for an animated cursor with count. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to README.md.
1 2 | # README: Tk | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | # README: Tk This is the **Tk 8.6.13** source distribution. You can get any source release of Tk from [our distribution site](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/files/Tcl/). 8.6 (production release, daily build) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Linux%22+branch%3Acore-8-6-branch) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Windows%22+branch%3Acore-8-6-branch) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22macOS%22+branch%3Acore-8-6-branch) <br> 8.7 (in development, daily build)) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Linux%22+branch%3Acore-8-branch) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Windows%22+branch%3Acore-8-branch) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22macOS%22+branch%3Acore-8-branch) 9.0 (in development, daily build)) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Linux%22+branch%3Amain) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Windows%22+branch%3Amain) [](https://github.com/tcltk/tk/actions?query=workflow%3A%22macOS%22+branch%3Amain) ## <a id="intro">1.</a> Introduction This directory contains the sources and documentation for Tk, a cross-platform GUI toolkit implemented with the Tcl scripting language. For details on features, incompatibilities, and potential problems with this release, see [the Tcl/Tk 8.6 Web page](https://www.tcl-lang.org/software/tcltk/8.6.html) or refer to the "changes" file in this directory, which contains a historical record of all changes to Tk. Tk is maintained, enhanced, and distributed freely by the Tcl community. Source code development and tracking of bug reports and feature requests take place at [core.tcl-lang.org](https://core.tcl-lang.org/). Tcl/Tk release and mailing list services are [hosted by SourceForge](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/) with the Tcl Developer Xchange hosted at [www.tcl-lang.org](https://www.tcl-lang.org). Tk is a freely available open-source package. You can do virtually anything you like with it, such as modifying it, redistributing it, and selling it either in whole or in part. See the file `license.terms` for complete information. ## <a id="tcl">2.</a> See Tcl README.md Please see the README.md file that comes with the associated Tcl release for more information. There are pointers there to extensive documentation. In addition, there are additional README files in the subdirectories of this distribution. |
Changes to changes.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
329 330 331 332 333 334 335 | is necessary in order to allow several menu buttons to share the same menu. *** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY *** 4/12/92 (bug fix) Fixed core dump that occurred in tkError.c when removing the first error record from the error list. | | | 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 | is necessary in order to allow several menu buttons to share the same menu. *** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY *** 4/12/92 (bug fix) Fixed core dump that occurred in tkError.c when removing the first error record from the error list. 4/15/92 (bug fix) Fixed bug in tkBind.c that prevented <KeyPress-1> event specifications from being processed correctly: the "1" was treated as a button name rather than a keysym. 4/18/92 (new feature) Added Tk_DefineCursor and Tk_UndefineCursor procedures. 4/18/92 (new feature) Major revision to listboxes. Can now scroll and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 | 10/18/96 (new features) A -menu option has been added to the toplevel widget command, which allows a menu to operate as a menubar. On the Macintosh, the menubar is displayed accross the top of the main monitor, just like with other applications. Under Windows and Unix, the menu is attached to the toplevel window. Also, changed some semantics. Tearoff menus will now reflect changes to the menu it was | | | 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 | 10/18/96 (new features) A -menu option has been added to the toplevel widget command, which allows a menu to operate as a menubar. On the Macintosh, the menubar is displayed accross the top of the main monitor, just like with other applications. Under Windows and Unix, the menu is attached to the toplevel window. Also, changed some semantics. Tearoff menus will now reflect changes to the menu it was torn off from, and are deleted when the master menu is deleted. Tearoffs also reflect more look-and-feel of the platforms they are running on. (SRP) 10/31/96 (bug fix) Under Windows, missing system cursors would generate an error instead of falling through to the Tk cursor of the same name. (SS) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 | into account the "-displayof" option. This problem also existed for the "font metrics" and "font measure" commands. (CCS) 9/16/97 (new feature) Added "resource delete" and "resource files" command to the Mac. Also fixed "resource write" when the resource was specified by id and already existed. (JI) | | | 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 | into account the "-displayof" option. This problem also existed for the "font metrics" and "font measure" commands. (CCS) 9/16/97 (new feature) Added "resource delete" and "resource files" command to the Mac. Also fixed "resource write" when the resource was specified by id and already existed. (JI) 9/16/97 (bug fix) Added null bindings to <Command-KeyPress> for the text and entry widget on the Macintosh. This prevents unbound command key sequences from having the character echoed to the widget. Also fixed Cut & Copy bindings. (JI) (RJ) 9/18/97 (bug fix) Revamped Macintosh focus code. Cut, Copy & Paste virtual events now go to the correct (focus) window. (RJ) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 | correctly. (hobbs) 2001-08-28 (bug fix) fixed tk_chooseDirectory crash on Win95. (baker) 2001-08-28 (bug fix) removed 2 second 'raise' delay seen by some Unix window managers. (hobbs, baker) | | | 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 5109 | correctly. (hobbs) 2001-08-28 (bug fix) fixed tk_chooseDirectory crash on Win95. (baker) 2001-08-28 (bug fix) removed 2 second 'raise' delay seen by some Unix window managers. (hobbs, baker) 2001-09-14 (bug fix) fixed memory leaks that occured if errors were thrown while initializing the channel for an image. (darley) 2001-09-20 (new feature) --enable-64bit support was added for HP 11 when using the native compiler. 2001-10-03 (new feature) finalized Win64 support with latest RC1 release and SDK. (hobbs, stacy) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 | 2017-08-08 (bug)[28d0b8] Follow ICCCM advice on X selection protocol (donchenko) 2017-08-08 (bug)[4966ca] Scidb race in notebook tab selection (cramer) --- Released 8.6.7, August 9, 2017 --- https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7421 7422 7423 7424 7425 | 2017-08-08 (bug)[28d0b8] Follow ICCCM advice on X selection protocol (donchenko) 2017-08-08 (bug)[4966ca] Scidb race in notebook tab selection (cramer) --- Released 8.6.7, August 9, 2017 --- https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details 2017-08-24 (bug)[f1a3ca] Memory leak in [text] B-tree (edhume3) 2017-08-24 (bug)[ee40fd] Report [console] init errors (the) 2017-08-24 (bug)[3295446] Improve history visibility in [console] (goth) 2017-08-24 (bug) canvas closed polylines fully honor -joinstyle (vogel) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
7523 7524 7525 7526 7527 7528 7529 |
2017-12-31 (bug)[6525e1] encoding leak in tkMacOSXProcessFiles (werner)
2018-01-07 (bug)[925262] New option -state for ttk::scale (vogel)
2018-01-07 (bug)[fa8de7] Crash [ttk::checkbutton .x -variable {}] (werner)
| | | 7500 7501 7502 7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 7514 |
2017-12-31 (bug)[6525e1] encoding leak in tkMacOSXProcessFiles (werner)
2018-01-07 (bug)[925262] New option -state for ttk::scale (vogel)
2018-01-07 (bug)[fa8de7] Crash [ttk::checkbutton .x -variable {}] (werner)
2018-01-16 (bug)[382712] Crash in [event generate . <KeyPress>] (werner)
2018-01-19 (bug)[657c38] Crash in menu destroy with checkbutton entry (werner)
2018-01-25 (bug)[de156e] Deny PRIMARY selection access in safe interps (nash)
2018-01-28 (bug)[b68710] Fixes in [text] bindings (nash)
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
7559 7560 7561 7562 7563 7564 7565 | 2018-07-04 (bug)[135696] Crash in [wm transient] (culler) 2018-07-04 (bug)[309b42] Improve ttk high-contrast-mode support (lemburg,vogel) 2018-07-17 (bug)[1088825] fix frame-2.17,3.9,3.10 on Mac (vogel) | | | 7536 7537 7538 7539 7540 7541 7542 7543 7544 7545 7546 7547 7548 7549 7550 | 2018-07-04 (bug)[135696] Crash in [wm transient] (culler) 2018-07-04 (bug)[309b42] Improve ttk high-contrast-mode support (lemburg,vogel) 2018-07-17 (bug)[1088825] fix frame-2.17,3.9,3.10 on Mac (vogel) 2018-07-27 (bug)[fabed1] GIF photo support for "deferred clear code" (vogel) 2018-08-08 (feature) Modern full-screen support on Mac OSX (walzer) 2018-08-12 (bug)[1875c1] scrollbar on Mac OSX (walzer) 2018-08-14 (bug)[1ba71a] KeyRelease events on Mac OSX(walzer) |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 | 2019-11-17 [90d555] workaround NSFontManager bad selections (culler) 2019-11-19 (new) Partial Emoji support in text displays (nijtmans,culler) - Released 8.6.10, Nov 21, 2019 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details | > | > | > | > > | > | > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > > | > > | > > | > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > > | > > | > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | > > > > | > > > > | > > > | > > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 7729 7730 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 7740 7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751 7752 7753 7754 7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 7761 7762 7763 7764 7765 7766 7767 7768 7769 7770 7771 7772 7773 7774 7775 7776 7777 7778 7779 7780 7781 7782 7783 7784 7785 7786 7787 7788 7789 7790 7791 7792 7793 7794 7795 7796 7797 7798 7799 7800 7801 7802 7803 7804 7805 7806 7807 7808 7809 7810 7811 7812 7813 7814 7815 7816 7817 7818 7819 7820 7821 7822 7823 7824 7825 7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 7833 7834 7835 7836 7837 7838 7839 7840 7841 7842 7843 7844 7845 7846 7847 7848 7849 7850 7851 7852 7853 7854 7855 7856 7857 7858 7859 7860 7861 7862 7863 7864 7865 7866 7867 7868 7869 7870 7871 7872 7873 7874 7875 7876 7877 7878 7879 7880 7881 7882 7883 7884 7885 7886 7887 7888 7889 7890 7891 7892 7893 7894 7895 7896 7897 7898 7899 7900 7901 7902 7903 7904 7905 7906 7907 7908 7909 7910 7911 7912 7913 7914 7915 7916 7917 7918 7919 7920 7921 7922 7923 7924 7925 7926 7927 7928 7929 7930 7931 7932 7933 7934 7935 7936 7937 7938 7939 7940 7941 7942 7943 7944 7945 7946 7947 7948 7949 7950 7951 7952 7953 7954 7955 7956 7957 7958 7959 7960 7961 7962 7963 7964 7965 7966 7967 7968 7969 7970 7971 7972 7973 7974 7975 7976 7977 7978 7979 7980 7981 7982 7983 7984 7985 7986 7987 7988 7989 7990 7991 7992 7993 7994 7995 7996 7997 7998 7999 8000 8001 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8007 8008 8009 8010 8011 8012 8013 8014 8015 8016 8017 8018 8019 8020 8021 8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 8027 8028 8029 8030 8031 8032 8033 8034 8035 8036 8037 8038 8039 8040 8041 8042 8043 8044 8045 8046 8047 8048 8049 8050 8051 8052 8053 8054 8055 8056 8057 8058 | 2019-11-17 [90d555] workaround NSFontManager bad selections (culler) 2019-11-19 (new) Partial Emoji support in text displays (nijtmans,culler) - Released 8.6.10, Nov 21, 2019 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details 2019-11-25 (bug)[a95373] TkKeyEvent platform variations (werner) 2019-11-26 (bug) workaround Win bug so test bind-34.3 passes (nijtmans) 2019-12-03 Aqua: white cursors in dark mode (culler) 2019-12-04 (bug)[749bd9] Aqua: systemControlAccentColor (bll,culler) 2019-12-14 (bug)[b3b56a] ttk respect -cursor option (vogel) 2019-12-14 (bug)[b094cb] Win: $tv -show grows widget width 1 pixel (vogel) 2019-12-14 (bug)[02a694] spinbox options used wrong db names (vogel) 2020-01-11 (bug)[2b8fa6] MouseWheel for ttk::scrollbar (oehlmann) 2020-01-18 (bug)[1771594] icursor and scrollregion, canvText-14.7 (vogel) 2020-01-18 (bug)[587937] tag list ops preserve list order (vogel) 2020-01-18 (bug)[2830360] lose invalid state at focus event, entry-10.1 (vogel) 2020-01-18 (bug)[077d49] string table options support null ok (vogel) 2020-01-18 (bug)[bf93d0] Aqua: unresponsive menubar (culler) 2020-01-31 (bug)[a196fb] restore support for unthreaded Tcl (porter,sebres) 2020-02-09 (bug)[90a4d7] fontconfig crash when no font installed (vogel) 2020-02-24 (bug) Aqua: incomplete floating window display (walzer) 2020-03-11 (bug)[fb2ec3] OSX 10.15+: full screen options (nicolas,walzer) 2020-03-12 (bug)[08e2f8] focus on unmapped windows, focus-7.1 (vogel) 2020-03-12 (bug)[2edd84] [$c postscript] result management (gavilan) 2020-03-22 (bug)[98662d] restore TK_MAC_DEBUG_DRAWING build (chavez) 2020-03-29 (bug)[655fe2] tearoff menu redraw artifacts (vogel) 2020-04-03 (bug)[efbedd] Aqua: compund button-like widget appearance (chavez) 2020-04-14 (bug)[87bade] Aqua: improved dealing with PressAndHold (culler) 2020-04-14 (bug)[376788] X: stop crash w/Noto Color Emoji font (nijtmans) 2020-04-15 (bug)[89354d] Aqua: text color w/o clipping (culler) 2020-04-15 (new) Aqua: assign Button 3 to the middle button (chavez) 2020-04-25 (bug)[3519111] treeview horizontal scroll, entry-2.1.1 (vogel) 2020-04-25 (bug)[141881] treeview vertical scroll, treeview-9.2 (vogel) 2020-05-01 (bug)[2712f4] X: crash angled text w/o Xft, canvText-20.2 (vogel) 2020-05-01 (bug)[cd8714] Win: long angled text (chavez) 2020-05-09 (bug)[88c9e0] treeview -selectmode none focus ring (gavilan) 2020-05-12 (new) Aqua: Rewrite of the Key event system (culler) 2020-05-12 (bug)[411359] Aqua: stop crashes/zombies related to TouchBar (culler) 2020-05-12 (new) Aqua: systemLinkColor (chavez) 2020-05-16 (bug)[40ada9] crash when active button is destroyed (chavez) 2020-05-28 (bug)[3c6660,601cea,4b50b7] Win10: ttk scale (nemethi,lanam) 2020-06-08 (bug)[2790615] Some callbacks not eval'd in global scope (nijtmans) 2020-06-25 Aqua: Update OSX version tests to support Big Sur (culler) 2020-06-27 (bug)[6920b2] dup in spinbox -values causes trouble (lanam) 2020-06-27 (bug)[5c51be] invalid mem read buffer in Tk_PhotoPut* (chavez) 2020-06-27 (bug)[16ef16] restore bind sequence support, bind-33.(16-21) (vogel) 2020-07-02 (bug)[2d2459] default style for combobox (bll) 2020-07-06 (bug)[40c4bf] double free, entry-19.21 (vogel) 2020-07-06 (bug)[e3888d] grab & warp, bind-36.1 (vogel) 2020-07-12 (bug)[2442314] fontchooser i18n (nijtmans) 2020-07-13 (bug)[7655f6] [*entry]: selected text drawing reform (chavez) 2020-07-14 (bug)[09abd7] workaround invalid key codes from Debian 10 (vogel) 2020-07-20 (bug)[cf3853] Aqua: improve bounds on non-Retina displays (chavez) 2020-08-01 Aqua: [winfo rgb] light and dark mode support (culler) 2020-08-15 (bug)[315104] Aqua: appearance change virtual events (culler) 2020-08-21 (bug)[291699] mouse binding for scrollbar grip (bll) 2020-09-08 (bug)[6c2425] buffer bounds violation (chavez) 2020-09-08 (bug)[2a6d63] OSX 10.6 crash (hellstrom,culler) 2020-09-08 (bug)[420feb] undefined behavior due to alignment (chavez,nijtmans) 2020-09-10 (bug)[ab1fea] Aqua init issues (culler) 2020-09-14 (bug)[71e18c] Aqua: crash in full screen toggle (culler) 2020-09-18 (bug)[4f4f03] Aqua: mouse drags across title bar (nab,culler) 2020-09-21 (bug)[d91e05] select/copy in disabled text (bll) 2020-09-27 (TIP #581) disfavor Master/Slave terminology (nijtmans) 2020-09-30 (bug)[59cba3] win: improve theme detection (bll,nijtmans) 2020-10-06 (bug)[175a6e] Aqua: support tiled windows (culler) 2020-10-07 (bug)[1fa8c3] Aqua: crash on resize during display (nab,culler) 2020-10-16 (bug)[c2483b] Aqua: consistent finalization (culler,nijtmans) 2020-11-06 (bug)[c9ebac] Aqua: use standard about dialog (culler) 2020-11-07 (bug)[4ebcc0] sticky fontchooser options (roseman,vogel) 2020-11-10 (bug)[f9fa92] Aqua: crash in color caching scheme (culler) 2020-11-20 (bug)[7185d2] Aqua: fixes to special menu support (culler) 2020-11-24 (bug)[4a40c6] Aqua: [wm manage] frame offset (chavez) 2020-12-04 (bug)[3ef77f] Aqua dark mode combobox focus ring (walzer,culler) 2020-12-15 (bug)[80e4c6] Aqua: progressbar animation (nab,culler) 2020-12-24 (bug)[6157a8] Aqua: file dialog -filetypes (davis,culler) - Released 8.6.11, Dec 31, 2020 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details 2021-01-04 (bug)[19fb7a] Mac: [tk_messageBox] use proper icons (ericwb,culler) 2021-01-11 (bug)[7beaed] ttk::bindMouseWheel syntax error (nemethi) 2021-01-15 (new) support 4 new keycodes: CodeInput, SingleCandidate, MultipleCandidate, PreviousCandidate (nijtmans) 2021-01-18 (new) Portable keycodes: OE, oe, Ydiaeresis (nijtmans) 2021-01-27 (bug)[bdcab8] Mac crash on non-BMP menu label (nab,culler) 2021-02-07 (bug)[9e1312] <Enter> to parent after child destroyed (leunissen) 2021-02-10 (bug)[d3cd4c] more robust notebook processing (nemethi) 2021-02-25 (bug)[234ee4] crash in [clipboard get] invalid encoding (nijtmans) 2021-02-25 (bug)[be9cad] Poor trace housekeeping -> tkwait segfault (michael) 2021-03-02 (bug)[1626ed] Mac: crash with dead key as menu accelerator (culler) 2021-03-22 (bug)[9b6065] restore Tcl [update], see window-2.12 (leunissen) 2021-04-07 (bug)[58222c] Mac: entry and spinbox bg colors (chavez,culler) 2021-04-18 (bug)[34db75,ea876b] cursor motion in peer text (vogel) 2021-04-26 (bug)[c97464] memleak in TkpDrawAngledChars (nab,culler) 2021-04-29 Mac: explicit backing CALayer to fix rendering issues (culler) 2021-05-02 Mac: respect key repeat system setting (culler) 2021-05-10 (bug)[171ba7] crash when grab and focus are not coordinated (culler) 2021-05-24 crash due to failed transient record housekeeping (culler) 2021-05-25 (bug)[7bda98] Mac: <Double-1> bindings fire twice on app activation 2021-06-03 (bug)[4401d3] Mac: improved support of pixel formats (chavez,culler) 2021-06-03 (bug)[8ecc3e] Mac: window exposed by Mission Control (chavez,culler) 2021-06-04 (bug)[099109] segfault reusing a container toplevel (culler) 2021-06-22 (bug)[4efbfe] static package init order in wish (werner) 2021-09-21 (bug)[033886] Win: hang in font loading (e-paine,vogel) 2021-10-14 (bug)[8ebed3] multi-thread safety in Xft use (werner) 2021-10-22 (new)[TIP 608] New virtual event <<TkWorldChanged>> (griffin) 2021-10-27 (bug) file dialog compatibility with Mac OS 12 (culler) 2021-10-29 (bug) Mac: stop crash when non-Tk windows go full screen (werner) 2021-10-30 (bug)[6ea0b3] Mac: grab from menu makes dead window (culler) - Released 8.6.12, Nov 5, 2021 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details 2021-11-09 (bug)[e699a7] Fix build on macOS < 10.12 (culler) 2021-11-10 (bug)[8aebca,ce5d98] Mac: fix minimize button details (culler) 2021-11-24 (bug)[18682c,733dae] Mac: Enter/Leave events for toplevels (culler) 2021-11-29 (bug)[4ac9d2] Mac: canvas screenshot with Img package position correction (chavez) 2021-11-30 (documentation cleanup) [bad305] improve wm protocol WM_DELETE_WINDOW documentation (culler) 2021-11-30 (new) Mac: new color index "SelectedMenuItemTextColor". 2021-12-01 (new)[TIP 599] Extended build information (nijtmans) 2021-12-04 (bug)[440c52] fix PPM/PGM read with graylevel > 255 (vogel) 2021-12-04 (bug)[5fb814] canvas redraw region for lines/polygones (vogel) 2021-12-04 (new)[631a0b] text widget: direct mouse events to insert mark, not current (vogel) 2021-12-06 (bug)[b164ef] fix mouse events for multiple toplevels (culler) 2021-12-07 (bug)[be8f5b] crash setting -type empty for a menu (vogel) 2021-12-10 (bug)[50fc02,50fc02,25894d,156e58] ImgPhoto pointer issues (chavez) 2021-12-20 (bug)[617861] -justify/-anchor defaults for ttk::label (nijtmans) 2021-12-20 (bug)[6be8b0] Mac: crash on drag and Cmd-w (culler) 2021-12-22 (bug)[a132b5] Mac: esc on combobox menu influences click reopening (culler) 2021-12-24 (bug)[915316] Mac: drag events not to initial widget (culler) 2021-12-27 (bug)[eb26d4] Mac: wrong beep when clicking outside a combobox (culler) 2021-12-30 (bug)[822450] Mac: crash on exit (culler) 2022-01-06 (bug)[b7d851] Mac: crash on tkdnd drop and window close (culler) 2022-01-09 (bug)[40bc81] embedding error test failure (vogel) 2022-01-16 (bug)[b1d115] No <Enter> event on new toplevel on current toplevel destruction (vogel) 2022-02-03 (bug)[3fefb3] crash in empty ttk::combobox when end index requested (vogel) 2022-02-07 (new)[247d80] Chinese message file (NewbieXvwu) 2022-02-07 (new) Support Windows ARM platform (nijtmans) 2022-02-11 (bug)[e331bc] NULL to memset in photo blank (chavez) 2022-02-12 (bug)[fc5073] Mac: crash on native file dialog and tooltip (walzer) 2022-02-17 (bug)[864b06] PNG photo image color numeric issue (chavez) 2022-02-24 (bug)[141a11] Mac: dialog box with global grab inresponsive on click in other toplevel (walzer) 2022-02-25 (bug)[f75190] tk_fontchooser: multiple font families, locale change, button activation (holger,vogel) 2022-02-25 (bug)[ce6b42] (in TCL bug tracker) ttk::spinbox increment event endless invokation (vogel) 2022-02-26 (bug)[c7052d] Win: middle mouse click blocks system clipbord (vogel) 2022-02-27 (bug)[292598,01acde,e02fc96,0c3dbe,ee49f3,d175bb] Mac: memory leaks (images, focus ring) (chavez) 2022-03-07 (bug)[2a6c62] Avoid invalid <<TreeviewSelect>> events (vogel,spjuth) 2022-03-16 (new)[f47920] Updates to Finnish message catalog (hippelainen) 2022-03-16 (bug)[424773] crash in test canvPs-5.1 (chavez,vogel) 2022-03-19 (bug)[5412c6] crash in test canvWind-2.1 (SVID,vogel,griffin) 2022-03-19 (bug)[54fe7a] crash in test textWind-18.3 (akuli,vogel) 2022-04-04 (bug)[29b5c2] error in tk_popup with separator entry selected (griffin) 2022-04-07 (bug)[415415] scale advances multiple steps on single click (vogel) 2022-04-10 (bug)[dc4c55] tk_popup entry index (mcdonald) 2022-04-15 (bug)[c0bf1b] XVirtualEvent buffer overflows (chavez) 2022-04-19 (new)[8dd3d5] Mac : use Fn + e to access Emoji (nijtmans) 2022-05-11 (bug)[88cfdc] Mac: dialog memory, avoid use after free (chavez) 2022-04-21 (new)[bf0f48] Mac: Optimization for compilation is now -O2 (nijtmans) 2022-05-08 (bug)[eedd79] potential crashes in option parsing when sizeof(enum) not equal to int (nijtmans) 2022-05-08 (bug)[0ce975] panedwindow calls memcpy with NULL pointer (chavez) 2022-05-22 (bug)[bee96b] Win: cursor warp, [tk busy] (mcdonald) 2022-06-07 (bug) GIF with multiple images may reuse transparent color (oehhar) 2022-06-12 (bug)[e4a051] Mac: map embedded window immediately (vogel) 2022-06-15 (bug)[b18434] cygwin path compiling issues (fassel) 2022-06-27 [aefdb8,be29f7] Updates to Russian message catalog (pylypenko) 2022-07-04 Updates to Esperanto message catalog (ender) 2022-07-19 (bug)[91ca77] Mac: map event handling (rosenburger,culler,landers) 2022-07-20 (bug)[40bc81,17f44d,150174,61e0bb] embedding error test failures (vogel) 2022-07-25 (bug)[a3b03f] Linux, Windows: improve (ttk) menubutton menu position (danckaert,vogel) 2022-07-29 Update keysym tables to latest X11R6 (nijtmans) 2022-08-22 [f6e4d4] consistent cross-platform polygon fill (akuli,chavez) 2022-09-04 (bug)[bc6020] test treeview-bc602049ab (bende,spjuth) 2022-09-08 (bug)[e17b6f] Mac: crash in test unixW-50.4 (chavez) 2022-09-20 [33de84] Mac: handle Apple deprecation of OSTypes (culler) 2022-09-20 (bug)[412b80] Mac menu: arrow key and menu selection (nab,culler) 2022-09-22 (bug)[1a46d8,1fa325] Mac: memleak, crash safety in color (chavez) 2022-10-17 [d93c81] Workaround faulty compiler optimization in VS 2022 (vogel) 2022-10-26 (bug)[435739] crash in test bind-37.1 (csok,vogel) 2022-10-28 (bug)[5e4e44] ttk::panedwindow drag robust wrt orientation variants (xolodho,vogel) - Released 8.6.13, Nov 22, 2022 - https://core.tcl-lang.org/tk/ for details |
Deleted compat/stdbool.h.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Deleted compat/stdint.h.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Added compat/stdlib.h.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 | /* * stdlib.h -- * * Declares facilities exported by the "stdlib" portion of the C library. * This file isn't complete in the ANSI-C sense; it only declares things * that are needed by Tcl. This file is needed even on many systems with * their own stdlib.h (e.g. SunOS) because not all stdlib.h files declare * all the procedures needed here (such as strtol/strtoul). * * Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. */ #ifndef _STDLIB #define _STDLIB extern void abort(void); extern double atof(const char *string); extern int atoi(const char *string); extern long atol(const char *string); extern void * calloc(unsigned long numElements, unsigned long size); extern void exit(int status); extern void free(void *blockPtr); extern char * getenv(const char *name); extern void * malloc(unsigned long numBytes); extern void qsort(void *base, unsigned long n, unsigned long size, int (*compar)( const void *element1, const void *element2)); extern void * realloc(void *ptr, unsigned long numBytes); extern char * realpath(const char *path, char *resolved_path); extern int mkstemps(char *templ, int suffixlen); extern int mkstemp(char *templ); extern char * mkdtemp(char *templ); extern long strtol(const char *string, char **endPtr, int base); extern unsigned long strtoul(const char *string, char **endPtr, int base); #endif /* _STDLIB */ |
Added compat/unistd.h.
> > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 | /* * unistd.h -- * * Macros, constants and prototypes for Posix conformance. * * Copyright 1989 Regents of the University of California Permission to use, * copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any * purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above * copyright notice appear in all copies. The University of California makes * no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. * It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. */ #ifndef _UNISTD #define _UNISTD #include <sys/types.h> #ifndef NULL # define NULL 0 #endif /* * Strict POSIX stuff goes here. Extensions go down below, in the ifndef * _POSIX_SOURCE section. */ extern void _exit(int status); extern int access(const char *path, int mode); extern int chdir(const char *path); extern int chown(const char *path, uid_t owner, gid_t group); extern int close(int fd); extern int dup(int oldfd); extern int dup2(int oldfd, int newfd); extern int execl(const char *path, ...); extern int execle(const char *path, ...); extern int execlp(const char *file, ...); extern int execv(const char *path, char *const argv[]); extern int execve(const char *path, char *const argv[], char *const *envp); extern int execvp(const char *file, char *const argv[]); extern pid_t fork(void); extern char * getcwd(char *buf, size_t size); extern gid_t getegid(void); extern uid_t geteuid(void); extern gid_t getgid(void); extern int getgroups(int bufSize, int *buffer); extern pid_t getpid(void); extern uid_t getuid(void); extern int isatty(int fd); extern long lseek(int fd, long offset, int whence); extern int pipe(int *fildes); extern int read(int fd, char *buf, size_t size); extern int setgid(gid_t group); extern int setuid(uid_t user); extern unsigned sleep(unsigned seconds); extern char * ttyname(int fd); extern int unlink(const char *path); extern int write(int fd, const char *buf, size_t size); #ifndef _POSIX_SOURCE extern char * crypt(const char *, const char *); extern int fchown(int fd, uid_t owner, gid_t group); extern int flock(int fd, int operation); extern int ftruncate(int fd, unsigned long length); extern int ioctl(int fd, int request, ...); extern int readlink(const char *path, char *buf, int bufsize); extern int setegid(gid_t group); extern int seteuid(uid_t user); extern int setreuid(int ruid, int euid); extern int symlink(const char *, const char *); extern int ttyslot(void); extern int truncate(const char *path, unsigned long length); extern int vfork(void); #endif /* _POSIX_SOURCE */ #endif /* _UNISTD */ |
Changes to doc/AddOption.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 | associated with \fItkwin\fR's main window. \fIName\fR contains the option being specified and consists of names and/or classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format. \fIValue\fR contains the text string to associate with \fIname\fR; this value will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR. \fIPriority\fR specifies the priority of the value; when options are queried using \fBTk_GetOption\fR, the value with the highest priority | | | | | | | | 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 | associated with \fItkwin\fR's main window. \fIName\fR contains the option being specified and consists of names and/or classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format. \fIValue\fR contains the text string to associate with \fIname\fR; this value will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR. \fIPriority\fR specifies the priority of the value; when options are queried using \fBTk_GetOption\fR, the value with the highest priority is returned. \fIPriority\fR must be between 0 and \fBTK_MAX_PRIO\fR (100). Some common priority values are: .IP \fBTK_WIDGET_DEFAULT_PRIO\fR (20) Used for default values hard-coded into widgets. .IP \fBTK_STARTUP_FILE_PRIO\fR (40) Used for options specified in application-specific startup files. .IP \fBTK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO\fR (60) Used for options specified in user-specific defaults files, such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into the X server, or user-specific startup files. .IP \fBTK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO\fR (80) Used for options specified interactively after the application starts running. .SH KEYWORDS class, name, option, add |
Changes to doc/ConfigWidg.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 |
.CS
typedef struct {
int \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIargvName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
| | | 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 |
.CS
typedef struct {
int \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIargvName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
int \fIoffset\fR;
int \fIspecFlags\fR;
const Tk_CustomOption *\fIcustomPtr\fR;
} \fBTk_ConfigSpec\fR;
.CE
The \fItype\fR field indicates what type of configuration option this is
(e.g. \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR for
an integer value). The \fItype\fR field indicates how to use the
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
157 158 159 160 161 162 163 | form, such as a color if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR or an integer if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR. This value is then stored in the record pointed to by \fIwidgRec\fR. This record is assumed to contain information relevant to the manager of the widget; its exact type is unknown to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. The \fIoffset\fR field of each \fIspecs\fR entry indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store the information about this configuration option. You should use the | | > | | 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 | form, such as a color if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR or an integer if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR. This value is then stored in the record pointed to by \fIwidgRec\fR. This record is assumed to contain information relevant to the manager of the widget; its exact type is unknown to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. The \fIoffset\fR field of each \fIspecs\fR entry indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store the information about this configuration option. You should use the \fBTk_Offset\fR macro to generate \fIoffset\fR values (see below for a description of \fBTk_Offset\fR). The location indicated by \fIwidgRec\fR and \fIoffset\fR will be referred to as the .QW target in the descriptions below. .PP The \fItype\fR field of each entry in \fIspecs\fR determines what to do with the string value of that configuration option. The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 | for N different widget types, then N of the high-order bits will be used. Each \fIspecs\fR entry will have one of more of those bits set in its \fIspecFlags\fR field to indicate the widget types for which this entry is valid. When calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR, \fIflags\fR will have a single one of these bits set to select the entries for the desired widget type. For a working example of this feature, see the code in tkButton.c. .SH TK_CONFIGUREINFO .PP The \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR procedure may be used to obtain information about one or all of the options for a given widget. Given a token for a window (\fItkwin\fR), a table describing the configuration options for a class of widgets (\fIspecs\fR), a pointer to a widget record containing the current information for | > > > > > > > | 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 | for N different widget types, then N of the high-order bits will be used. Each \fIspecs\fR entry will have one of more of those bits set in its \fIspecFlags\fR field to indicate the widget types for which this entry is valid. When calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR, \fIflags\fR will have a single one of these bits set to select the entries for the desired widget type. For a working example of this feature, see the code in tkButton.c. .SH TK_OFFSET .PP The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating the \fIoffset\fR values for entries in Tk_ConfigSpec structures. It takes two arguments: the name of a type of record, and the name of a field in that record. It returns the byte offset of the named field in records of the given type. .SH TK_CONFIGUREINFO .PP The \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR procedure may be used to obtain information about one or all of the options for a given widget. Given a token for a window (\fItkwin\fR), a table describing the configuration options for a class of widgets (\fIspecs\fR), a pointer to a widget record containing the current information for |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtImgType.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | > > > > > | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateImageType, Tk_GetImageMasterData, Tk_GetImageModelData, Tk_InitImageArgs \- define new kind of image .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR) .sp ClientData \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR) .sp .VS "TIP 581" ClientData \fBTk_GetImageModelData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR) .VE "TIP 581" .sp \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR(\fIinterp, argc, argvPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtrPtr .AP "const Tk_ImageType" *typePtr in Structure that defines the new type of image. For Tk 8.4 and earlier this must be static: a |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
109 110 111 112 113 114 115 |
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
const char *\fIname\fR,
int \fIobjc\fR,
Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[],
const Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
| | | 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 |
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
const char *\fIname\fR,
int \fIobjc\fR,
Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[],
const Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
Tk_ImageMaster \fImodel\fR,
ClientData *\fImodelDataPtr\fR);
.CE
The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the \fBimage\fR
command was invoked, and \fIname\fR is the name for the new image,
which was either specified explicitly in the \fBimage\fR command
or generated automatically by the \fBimage\fR command.
The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all the configuration
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 | The \fImodelData\fR argument will be the same as the value stored in \fI*modelDataPtr\fR by \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. \fIdeleteProc\fR should release any resources associated with the image. .SH TK_GETIMAGEMODELDATA .PP | | > > > > | > > > > | 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 |
The \fImodelData\fR argument will be the same as the value
stored in \fI*modelDataPtr\fR by \fIcreateProc\fR when the
image was created.
\fIdeleteProc\fR should release any resources associated with
the image.
.SH TK_GETIMAGEMODELDATA
.PP
The procedure \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR may be invoked to retrieve
information about an image. For example, an image manager can use this
procedure to locate its image model data for an image.
If there exists an image named \fIname\fR
in the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR, then \fI*typePtrPtr\fR is
filled in with type information for the image (the \fItypePtr\fR value
passed to \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR when the image type was registered)
and the return value is the ClientData value returned by the
\fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created (this is typically a
pointer to the image model data structure). If no such image exists
then NULL is returned and NULL is stored at \fI*typePtrPtr\fR.
.PP
.VS "TIP 581"
\fBTk_GetImageModelData\fR is synonym for \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR
.VE "TIP 581"
.SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT"
.PP
In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR
was incompatibly different, with the following prototype:
.CS
typedef int \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR(
Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
char *\fIname\fR,
int \fIargc\fR,
char **\fIargv\fR,
Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR,
Tk_ImageMaster \fImodel\fR,
ClientData *\fImodelDataPtr\fR);
.CE
Legacy programs and libraries dating from those days may still
contain code that defines extended Tk image types using the old
interface. The Tk header file will still support this legacy
interface if the code is compiled with the macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR
defined.
.PP
.VS "TIP 581"
\fITk_ImageModel\fR is synonym for \fITk_ImageMaster\fR
.VE "TIP 581"
.PP
When the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR legacy support is enabled, you may
see the routine \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR in use. This was a migration
tool used to create stub-enabled extensions that could be loaded
into interps containing all versions of Tk 8.1 and later. Tk 8.5 no longer
provides this routine, but uses a macro to convert any attempted
calls of this routine into an empty comment. Any stub-enabled
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/CrtItemType.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 |
The first data structure is a Tk_ItemType; it contains
information such as the name of the type and pointers to
the standard procedures implemented by the type manager:
.PP
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ItemType {
const char *\fIname\fR;
| | < < < | 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 |
The first data structure is a Tk_ItemType; it contains
information such as the name of the type and pointers to
the standard procedures implemented by the type manager:
.PP
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ItemType {
const char *\fIname\fR;
int \fIitemSize\fR;
Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
const Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR;
Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR;
Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR;
int \fIalwaysRedraw\fR;
Tk_ItemPointProc *\fIpointProc\fR;
Tk_ItemAreaProc *\fIareaProc\fR;
Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *\fIpostscriptProc\fR;
Tk_ItemScaleProc *\fIscaleProc\fR;
Tk_ItemTranslateProc *\fItranslateProc\fR;
Tk_ItemIndexProc *\fIindexProc\fR;
Tk_ItemCursorProc *\fIicursorProc\fR;
Tk_ItemSelectionProc *\fIselectionProc\fR;
Tk_ItemInsertProc *\fIinsertProc\fR;
Tk_ItemDCharsProc *\fIdCharsProc\fR;
Tk_ItemType *\fInextPtr\fR;
} \fBTk_ItemType\fR;
.CE
.PP
The fields of a Tk_ItemType structure are described in more detail
later in this manual entry.
When \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is called, its \fItypePtr\fR
argument must point to a structure with all of the fields initialized
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
548 549 550 551 552 553 554 | .CE .PP The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning, and \fIdeltaX\fR and \fIdeltaY\fR give the amounts that should be added to each x and y coordinate within the item. The type manager should adjust the item's coordinates and update the bounding box in the item's header. | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 | .CE .PP The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning, and \fIdeltaX\fR and \fIdeltaY\fR give the amounts that should be added to each x and y coordinate within the item. The type manager should adjust the item's coordinates and update the bounding box in the item's header. .SS INDEXPROC .PP \fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR is invoked by Tk to translate a string index specification into a numerical index, for example during the \fBindex\fR widget command. It is only relevant for item types that support indexable text or coordinates; \fItypePtr\->indexProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/EventHndlr.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateEventHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | < < < < < < < < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_CreateEventHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateEventHandler, Tk_DeleteEventHandler \- associate procedure callback with an X event .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which events may occur. .AP "unsigned long" mask in Bit-mask of events (such as \fBButtonPressMask\fR) for which \fIproc\fR should be called. .AP Tk_EventProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever an event in \fImask\fR occurs |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
77 78 79 80 81 82 83 | When a window is deleted all of its handlers will be deleted automatically; in this case there is no need to call \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR. .PP If multiple handlers are declared for the same type of X event on the same window, then the handlers will be invoked in the order they were created. | < < < < < | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | When a window is deleted all of its handlers will be deleted automatically; in this case there is no need to call \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR. .PP If multiple handlers are declared for the same type of X event on the same window, then the handlers will be invoked in the order they were created. .SH KEYWORDS bind, callback, event, handler |
Changes to doc/FreeXId.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | Display for which \fIid\fR was allocated. .AP XID id in Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics context, or colormap) that is no longer in use. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 | Display for which \fIid\fR was allocated. .AP XID id in Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics context, or colormap) that is no longer in use. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The default allocator for resource identifiers provided by Xlib is very simple-minded and does not allow resource identifiers to be re-used. If a long-running application reaches the end of the resource id space, it will generate an X protocol error and crash. Tk replaces the default id allocator with its own allocator, which allows identifiers to be reused. In order for this to work, \fBTk_FreeXId\fR must be called to tell the allocator about resources that have been freed. Tk automatically calls \fBTk_FreeXId\fR whenever it frees a resource, so if you use procedures like \fBTk_GetFont\fR, \fBTk_GetGC\fR, and \fBTk_GetPixmap\fR then you need not call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR. However, if you allocate resources directly from Xlib, for example by calling \fBXCreatePixmap\fR, then you should call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR when you call the corresponding Xlib free procedure, such as \fBXFreePixmap\fR. If you do not call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR then the resource identifier will be lost, which could cause problems if the application runs long enough to lose all of the available identifiers. .SH KEYWORDS resource identifier |
Changes to doc/GetFont.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_AllocFontFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_AllocFontFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_AllocFontFromObj, Tk_GetFont, Tk_GetFontFromObj, Tk_NameOfFont, Tk_FreeFontFromObj, Tk_FreeFont \- maintain database of fonts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_GetFont(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_GetFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp void |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetFont\fR maintain a database of all fonts they have allocated. If the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be shared for all uses. The underlying resources will be freed automatically when no-one is using the font anymore. .PP | < < < | 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetFont\fR maintain a database of all fonts they have allocated. If the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be shared for all uses. The underlying resources will be freed automatically when no-one is using the font anymore. .PP The procedure \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetFont\fR. Given a \fItkfont\fR that was created by \fBTk_GetFont\fR (or \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR), the return value is the \fIstring\fR argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetFont\fR to create the font. The string returned by \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the \fItkfont\fR is deleted. The caller must not modify this string. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/GetPixels.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_GetPixelsFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_GetPixelsFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM \- translate between strings and screen units .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetPixels(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetMMFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fB)\fR .sp int |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 | by a character that is not one of the ones above) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP | < < < | 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 | by a character that is not one of the ones above) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetPixels\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR except that the screen distance is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetPixels\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetPixels\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetMMFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR are similar to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetPixels\fR (respectively) except that they convert the screen distance to millimeters and store a double-precision floating-point result at \fI*doublePtr\fR. .SH KEYWORDS centimeters, convert, inches, millimeters, pixels, points, screen units |
Changes to doc/GetScroll.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR parses the arguments expected by widget scrolling commands such as \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR. It receives the entire list of words that make up a widget command and parses the words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2]. The words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2] must have one of the following forms: .CS \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR | | | | | | | < | 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 | \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR parses the arguments expected by widget scrolling commands such as \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR. It receives the entire list of words that make up a widget command and parses the words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2]. The words starting with \fIobjv\fR[2] must have one of the following forms: .CS \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR \fBscroll \fInumber\fB units\fR \fBscroll \fInumber\fB pages\fR .CE .LP Any of the \fBmoveto\fR, \fBscroll\fR, \fBunits\fR, and \fBpages\fR keywords may be abbreviated. If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBmoveto\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_MOVETO\fR is returned as result and \fI*fractionPtr\fR is filled in with the \fIfraction\fR argument to the command, which must be a proper real value. If \fIobjv\fR has the \fBscroll\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_UNITS\fR or \fBTK_SCROLL_PAGES\fR is returned and \fI*stepsPtr\fR is filled in with the \fInumber\fR value, which must be a proper integer. If an error occurs in parsing the arguments, \fBTK_SCROLL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in interpreter \fIinterp\fR's result. .PP \fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR is identical in function to \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR. However, \fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR accepts string arguments, making it more appropriate for use with legacy widgets. .SH KEYWORDS parse, scrollbar, scrolling command, xview, yview |
Changes to doc/ImgChanged.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fImodel, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS | | | | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fImodel, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageMaster imageHeight .AP Tk_ImageMaster model in Token for image, which was passed to image's \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. .AP int x in X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured from upper-left corner of image). .AP int y in Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 | the image are notified so that they can redisplay themselves appropriately. The \fImodel\fR argument identifies the image, and \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR specify a rectangular region within the image that needs to be redrawn. \fIimageWidth\fR and \fIimageHeight\fR specify the image's (new) size. .PP An image manager should call \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR during its \fIcreateProc\fR to specify the image's initial size and to force redisplay if there are existing instances for the image. If any of the pixel values in the image should change later on, \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR should be called again with \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR values that cover all the pixels | > > > > | 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | the image are notified so that they can redisplay themselves appropriately. The \fImodel\fR argument identifies the image, and \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR specify a rectangular region within the image that needs to be redrawn. \fIimageWidth\fR and \fIimageHeight\fR specify the image's (new) size. .PP .VS "TIP 581" \fITk_ImageModel\fR is synonym for \fITk_ImageMaster\fR .VE "TIP 581" .PP An image manager should call \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR during its \fIcreateProc\fR to specify the image's initial size and to force redisplay if there are existing instances for the image. If any of the pixel values in the image should change later on, \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR should be called again with \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR values that cover all the pixels |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ManageGeom.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 |
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fImgrPtr\fR contains information about
the geometry manager:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIname\fR;
Tk_GeomRequestProc *\fIrequestProc\fR;
| | | 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 |
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fImgrPtr\fR contains information about
the geometry manager:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIname\fR;
Tk_GeomRequestProc *\fIrequestProc\fR;
Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *\fIlostSlaveProc\fR;
} \fBTk_GeomMgr\fR;
.CE
The \fIname\fR field is the textual name for the geometry manager,
such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR; this value will be returned
by the command \fBwinfo manager\fR.
.PP
\fIrequestProc\fR is a procedure in the geometry manager that
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
63 64 65 66 67 68 69 | .CE The parameters to \fIrequestProc\fR will be identical to the corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR. \fIclientData\fR usually points to a data structure containing application-specific information about how to manage \fItkwin\fR's geometry. .PP | | | | | | | | 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 |
.CE
The parameters to \fIrequestProc\fR will be identical to the
corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR.
\fIclientData\fR usually points to a data
structure containing application-specific information about
how to manage \fItkwin\fR's geometry.
.PP
The \fIlostSlaveProc\fR field of \fImgrPtr\fR points to another
procedure in the geometry manager.
Tk will invoke \fIlostSlaveProc\fR if some other manager
calls \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR to claim
\fItkwin\fR away from the current geometry manager.
\fIlostSlaveProc\fR is not invoked if \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR is
called with a NULL value for \fImgrPtr\fR (presumably the current
geometry manager has made this call, so it already knows that the
window is no longer managed), nor is it called if \fImgrPtr\fR
is the same as the window's current geometry manager.
\fIlostSlaveProc\fR should have
arguments and results that match the following prototype:
.CS
typedef void \fBTk_GeomLostSlaveProc\fR(
ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR);
.CE
The parameters to \fIlostSlaveProc\fR will be identical to the
corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR.
.SH KEYWORDS
callback, geometry, managed, request, unmanaged
|
Changes to doc/NameOfImg.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .SH NAME Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * | | | | > > > > | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | .SH NAME Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fIimageMaster\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster .AP Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster in Token for image, which was passed to image manager's \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure is invoked by image managers to find out the name of an image. Given the token for the image, it returns the string name for the image. .PP .VS "TIP 581" \fITk_ImageModel\fR is synonym for \fITk_ImageMaster\fR .VE "TIP 581" .SH KEYWORDS image manager, image name |
Changes to doc/ParseArgv.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 |
.PP
The \fIargTable\fR array specifies the kinds of arguments that are
expected; each of its entries has the following structure:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIkey\fR;
int \fItype\fR;
| | | | 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 |
.PP
The \fIargTable\fR array specifies the kinds of arguments that are
expected; each of its entries has the following structure:
.CS
typedef struct {
const char *\fIkey\fR;
int \fItype\fR;
char *\fIsrc\fR;
char *\fIdst\fR;
const char *\fIhelp\fR;
} \fBTk_ArgvInfo\fR;
.CE
The \fIkey\fR field is a string such as
.QW \-display
or
.QW \-bg
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 |
char *fileName = defaultFileName;
Boolean exec = FALSE;
/*
* Define option descriptions.
*/
Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
| | | | | | 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 |
char *fileName = defaultFileName;
Boolean exec = FALSE;
/*
* Define option descriptions.
*/
Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = {
{"\-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, (char *) &debugFlag,
"Turn on debugging printfs"},
{"\-N", TK_ARGV_INT, NULL, (char *) &numReps,
"Number of repetitions"},
{"\-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, NULL, (char *) &fileName,
"Name of file for output"},
{"x", TK_ARGV_REST, NULL, (char *) &exec,
"File to exec, followed by any arguments (must be last argument)."},
{NULL, TK_ARGV_END, NULL, NULL,
NULL}
};
main(argc, argv)
int argc;
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetClassProcs.3.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 |
.PP
\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR is called to register a set of procedures that
are used as callbacks in different places.
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR contains the following:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
| | | 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 |
.PP
\fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR is called to register a set of procedures that
are used as callbacks in different places.
.PP
The structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR contains the following:
.CS
typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs {
unsigned int \fIsize\fR;
Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *\fIworldChangedProc\fR;
Tk_ClassCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR;
Tk_ClassModalProc *\fImodalProc\fR;
} \fBTk_ClassProcs\fR;
.CE
The \fIsize\fR field is used to simplify future expansion of the
structure. It should always be set to (literally) \fBsizeof(Tk_ClassProcs)\fR.
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/SetOptions.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_SetOptions 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_SetOptions 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateOptionTable, Tk_DeleteOptionTable, Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, Tk_FreeSavedOptions, Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, Tk_GetOptionValue, Tk_GetOptionInfo, Tk_FreeConfigOptions, Tk_Offset \- process configuration options .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Tk_OptionTable \fBTk_CreateOptionTable(\fIinterp, templatePtr\fB)\fR .sp |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 | Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetOptionValue(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetOptionInfo(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeConfigOptions(\fIrecordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_SavedOptions "*const objv[]" in/out .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in A Tcl interpreter. Most procedures use this only for returning error messages; if it is NULL then no error messages are returned. For \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR the value cannot be NULL; it gives the interpreter in which the option table will be used. .AP "const Tk_OptionSpec" *templatePtr in Points to an array of static information that describes the configuration options that are supported. Used to build a Tk_OptionTable. The information pointed to by this argument must exist for the lifetime of the Tk_OptionTable. .AP Tk_OptionTable optionTable in Token for an option table. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. | > > > | | 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 | Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetOptionValue(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetOptionInfo(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeConfigOptions(\fIrecordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_Offset(\fItype, field\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_SavedOptions "*const objv[]" in/out .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in A Tcl interpreter. Most procedures use this only for returning error messages; if it is NULL then no error messages are returned. For \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR the value cannot be NULL; it gives the interpreter in which the option table will be used. .AP "const Tk_OptionSpec" *templatePtr in Points to an array of static information that describes the configuration options that are supported. Used to build a Tk_OptionTable. The information pointed to by this argument must exist for the lifetime of the Tk_OptionTable. .AP Tk_OptionTable optionTable in Token for an option table. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. .AP char *recordPtr in/out Points to structure in which values of configuration options are stored; fields of this record are modified by procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR and read by procedures such as \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in For options such as \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR, this argument indicates the window in which the option will be used. If \fIoptionTable\fR uses no window-dependent options, then a NULL value may be supplied for |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
123 124 125 126 127 128 129 | class. A Tk_OptionTable may be used only in a single interpreter, given by the \fIinterp\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. When an option table is no longer needed \fBTk_DeleteOptionTable\fR should be called to free all of its resources. All of the option tables for a Tcl interpreter are freed automatically if the interpreter is deleted. .PP \fBTk_InitOptions\fR is invoked when a new widget is created to set the | | < | < | > > | 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 | class. A Tk_OptionTable may be used only in a single interpreter, given by the \fIinterp\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. When an option table is no longer needed \fBTk_DeleteOptionTable\fR should be called to free all of its resources. All of the option tables for a Tcl interpreter are freed automatically if the interpreter is deleted. .PP \fBTk_InitOptions\fR is invoked when a new widget is created to set the default values. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR is passed a token for an option table (\fIoptionTable\fR) and a pointer to a widget record (\fIrecordPtr\fR), which is the C structure that holds information about this widget. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR uses the information in the option table to choose an appropriate default for each option, then it stores the default value directly into the widget record, overwriting any information that was already present in the widget record. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR. If an error occurred while setting the default values (e.g., because a default value was erroneous) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. For any widget's configuration option that has \fBTK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR set in its \fIflags\fR field, the above initialization is fully skipped, see below. .PP \fBTk_SetOptions\fR is invoked to modify configuration options based on information specified in a Tcl command. The command might be one that creates a new widget, or a command that modifies options on an existing widget. The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe the values of the arguments from the Tcl command. \fIObjv\fR must contain an even number of objects: the first object of each pair gives the name of |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 |
(e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an unknown option name) then NULL
is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result unless
\fIinterp\fR is NULL.
.PP
\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR must be invoked when a widget is deleted.
It frees all of the resources associated with any of the configuration
options defined in \fIrecordPtr\fR by \fIoptionTable\fR.
.SH "TEMPLATES"
.PP
The array of Tk_OptionSpec structures passed to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR
via its \fItemplatePtr\fR argument describes the configuration options
supported by a particular class of widgets. Each structure specifies
one configuration option and has the following fields:
.CS
typedef struct {
Tk_OptionType \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIoptionName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
| > > > > > > | | | 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 |
(e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an unknown option name) then NULL
is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result unless
\fIinterp\fR is NULL.
.PP
\fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR must be invoked when a widget is deleted.
It frees all of the resources associated with any of the configuration
options defined in \fIrecordPtr\fR by \fIoptionTable\fR.
.PP
The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating the
\fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR values for entries in
Tk_OptionSpec structures. It takes two arguments: the name of a type
of record, and the name of a field in that record. It returns the byte
offset of the named field in records of the given type.
.SH "TEMPLATES"
.PP
The array of Tk_OptionSpec structures passed to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR
via its \fItemplatePtr\fR argument describes the configuration options
supported by a particular class of widgets. Each structure specifies
one configuration option and has the following fields:
.CS
typedef struct {
Tk_OptionType \fItype\fR;
const char *\fIoptionName\fR;
const char *\fIdbName\fR;
const char *\fIdbClass\fR;
const char *\fIdefValue\fR;
int \fIobjOffset\fR;
int \fIinternalOffset\fR;
int \fIflags\fR;
const void *\fIclientData\fR;
int \fItypeMask\fR;
} \fBTk_OptionSpec\fR;
.CE
The \fItype\fR field indicates what kind of configuration option this is
(e.g. \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR for
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
268 269 270 271 272 273 274 | \fIdbName\fR is NULL then the option database is not used by \fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. The \fIdefValue\fR field specifies a default value for this configuration option if no value is specified in the option database. The \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields indicate where to store the value of this option in widget records (more on this below); values for the \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields should always be generated with the | | | 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 | \fIdbName\fR is NULL then the option database is not used by \fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. The \fIdefValue\fR field specifies a default value for this configuration option if no value is specified in the option database. The \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields indicate where to store the value of this option in widget records (more on this below); values for the \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields should always be generated with the \fBTk_Offset\fR macro. The \fIflags\fR field contains additional information to control the processing of this configuration option (see below for details). \fIClientData\fR provides additional type-specific data needed by certain types. For instance, for \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR types, \fIclientData\fR is a string giving the default value to use on monochrome displays. See the descriptions of the different types |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
416 417 418 419 420 421 422 | type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to zero. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_RELIEF\fR The value must be standard relief such as \fBraised\fR. The internal form is an integer relief value such as \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR | | | | 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 | type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to zero. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_RELIEF\fR The value must be standard relief such as \fBraised\fR. The internal form is an integer relief value such as \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to \fBTK_RELIEF_NULL\fR. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR The value may be any string. The internal form is a (char *) pointer that points to a dynamically allocated copy of the value. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/WindowId.3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_WindowId 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME | | < < < | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH Tk_WindowId 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .so man.macros .BS .SH NAME Tk_WindowId, Tk_Parent, Tk_Display, Tk_DisplayName, Tk_ScreenNumber, Tk_Screen, Tk_X, Tk_Y, Tk_Width, Tk_Height, Tk_Changes, Tk_Attributes, Tk_IsContainer, Tk_IsEmbedded, Tk_IsMapped, Tk_IsTopLevel, Tk_ReqWidth, Tk_ReqHeight, Tk_MinReqWidth, Tk_MinReqHeight, Tk_InternalBorderLeft, Tk_InternalBorderRight, Tk_InternalBorderTop, Tk_InternalBorderBottom, Tk_Visual, Tk_Depth, Tk_Colormap, Tk_Interp \- retrieve information from Tk's local data structure .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include <tk.h>\fR .sp Window \fBTk_WindowId\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_Parent\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Display * \fBTk_Display\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_DisplayName\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Screen * \fBTk_Screen\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_X\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | \fBTk_Depth\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Colormap \fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Interp * \fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR) | < < < | 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 | \fBTk_Depth\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Colormap \fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Interp * \fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 | .PP \fBTk_Display\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib display structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR. \fBTk_DisplayName\fR returns an ASCII string identifying \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR returns the index of \fItkwin\fR's screen among all the screens of \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_Screen\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR's screen. | < < | 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 | .PP \fBTk_Display\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib display structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR. \fBTk_DisplayName\fR returns an ASCII string identifying \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR returns the index of \fItkwin\fR's screen among all the screens of \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_Screen\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR's screen. .PP \fBTk_X\fR, \fBTk_Y\fR, \fBTk_Width\fR, and \fBTk_Height\fR return information about \fItkwin's\fR location within its parent and its size. The location information refers to the upper-left pixel in the window, or its border if there is one. The width and height information refers to the interior size of the window, not including any border. \fBTk_Changes\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | information about the visual characteristics of a window. \fBTk_Visual\fR returns the visual type for the window, \fBTk_Depth\fR returns the number of bits per pixel, and \fBTk_Colormap\fR returns the current colormap for the window. The visual characteristics are normally set from the defaults for the window's screen, but they may be overridden by calling \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR. | < < | 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 | information about the visual characteristics of a window. \fBTk_Visual\fR returns the visual type for the window, \fBTk_Depth\fR returns the number of bits per pixel, and \fBTk_Colormap\fR returns the current colormap for the window. The visual characteristics are normally set from the defaults for the window's screen, but they may be overridden by calling \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR. .SH KEYWORDS attributes, colormap, depth, display, height, geometry manager, identifier, mapped, requested size, screen, top-level, visual, width, window, x, y |
Changes to doc/bind.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 | the window. Although the \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to assign an arbitrary set of binding tags to a window, the default binding tags provide the following behavior: .IP \(bu 3 If a tag is the name of an internal window the binding applies to that window. .IP \(bu 3 If the tag is the name of a toplevel window the binding applies to the toplevel window and all its internal windows. .IP \(bu 3 | > > > < < < | | 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 | the window. Although the \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to assign an arbitrary set of binding tags to a window, the default binding tags provide the following behavior: .IP \(bu 3 If a tag is the name of an internal window the binding applies to that window. .IP \(bu 3 If the tag is the name of a class of widgets, such as \fBButton\fR, the binding applies to all widgets in that class. .IP \(bu 3 If the tag is the name of a toplevel window the binding applies to the toplevel window and all its internal windows. .IP \(bu 3 If \fItag\fR has the value \fBall\fR, the binding applies to all windows in the application. .SH "EVENT PATTERNS" .PP The \fIsequence\fR argument specifies a sequence of one or more event patterns, with optional white space between the patterns. Each event pattern may take one of three forms. In the simplest case it is a single printing ASCII character, such as \fBa\fR or \fB[\fR. The character may not be a space character or the character \fB<\fR. This form of pattern matches a \fBKeyPress\fR event for the particular character. The second form of pattern is longer but more general. It has the following syntax: .CS \fB<\fImodifier\-modifier\-type\-detail\fB>\fR .CE The entire event pattern is surrounded by angle brackets. Inside the angle brackets are zero or more modifiers, an event |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
164 165 166 167 168 169 170 | .PP The \fItype\fR field may be any of the standard X event types, with a few extra abbreviations. The \fItype\fR field will also accept a couple non-standard X event types that were added to better support the Macintosh and Windows platforms. Below is a list of all the valid types; where two names appear together, they are synonyms. .DS | | | | | 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 | .PP The \fItype\fR field may be any of the standard X event types, with a few extra abbreviations. The \fItype\fR field will also accept a couple non-standard X event types that were added to better support the Macintosh and Windows platforms. Below is a list of all the valid types; where two names appear together, they are synonyms. .DS .ta \w'\fBButtonPress, Button\0\0\0\fR'u +\w'\fBKeyPress, Key\0\0\0\fR'u \fBActivate\fR \fBDestroy\fR \fBMap\fR \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButton\fR \fBEnter\fR \fBMapRequest\fR \fBButtonRelease\fR \fBExpose\fR \fBMotion\fR \fBCirculate\fR \fBFocusIn\fR \fBMouseWheel\fR \fBCirculateRequest\fR \fBFocusOut\fR \fBProperty\fR \fBColormap\fR \fBGravity\fR \fBReparent\fR \fBConfigure\fR \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKey\fR \fBResizeRequest\fR \fBConfigureRequest\fR \fBKeyRelease\fR \fBUnmap\fR \fBCreate\fR \fBLeave\fR \fBVisibility\fR \fBDeactivate\fR .DE Most of the above events have the same fields and behaviors as events in the X Windowing system. You can find more detailed descriptions of these events in any X window programming book. A couple of the events |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 | value determines which direction your widget should scroll. Positive values should scroll up and negative values should scroll down. .RS .PP Horizontal scrolling uses \fBShift-MouseWheel\fR events, with positive \fB%D\fR \fIdelta\fR substitution indicating left scrolling and negative right scrolling. | > > > > | < < < | | | | | 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 | value determines which direction your widget should scroll. Positive values should scroll up and negative values should scroll down. .RS .PP Horizontal scrolling uses \fBShift-MouseWheel\fR events, with positive \fB%D\fR \fIdelta\fR substitution indicating left scrolling and negative right scrolling. Only Windows and macOS Aqua typically fire \fBMouseWheel\fR and \fBShift-MouseWheel\fR events. On X11 vertical scrolling is rather supported through \fBButton-4\fR and \fBButton-5\fR events, and horizontal scrolling through \fBShift-Button-4\fR and \fBShift-Button-5\fR events. Horizontal scrolling events may fire from many different hardware units such as tilt wheels or touchpads. Horizontal scrolling can also be emulated by holding Shift and scrolling vertically. .RE .IP "\fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR" 5 The \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events are generated whenever a key is pressed or released. \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events are sent to the window which currently has the keyboard focus. .IP "\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR" 5 The \fBButtonPress\fR and \fBButtonRelease\fR events are generated when the user presses or releases a mouse button. \fBMotion\fR events are generated whenever the pointer is moved. \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events are normally sent to the window containing the pointer. .RS .PP When a mouse button is pressed, the window containing the pointer automatically obtains a temporary pointer grab. Subsequent \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events will be sent to that window, regardless of which window contains the pointer, until all buttons have been released. .RE .IP \fBConfigure\fR 5 A \fBConfigure\fR event is sent to a window whenever its size, position, or border width changes, and sometimes |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
360 361 362 363 364 365 366 | This event type is included only for completeness; there is no reliable way to track changes to a window's position in the stacking order. .RE .SS "EVENT DETAILS" .PP The last part of a long event specification is \fIdetail\fR. In the | | | | | | | | | 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 | This event type is included only for completeness; there is no reliable way to track changes to a window's position in the stacking order. .RE .SS "EVENT DETAILS" .PP The last part of a long event specification is \fIdetail\fR. In the case of a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, it is the number of a button (1\-5). If a button number is given, then only an event on that particular button will match; if no button number is given, then an event on any button will match. Note: giving a specific button number is different than specifying a button modifier; in the first case, it refers to a button being pressed or released, while in the second it refers to some other button that is already depressed when the matching event occurs. If a button number is given then \fItype\fR may be omitted: if will default to \fBButtonPress\fR. For example, the specifier \fB<1>\fR is equivalent to \fB<ButtonPress\-1>\fR. .PP If the event type is \fBKeyPress\fR or \fBKeyRelease\fR, then \fIdetail\fR may be specified in the form of an X keysym. Keysyms are textual specifications for particular keys on the keyboard; they include all the alphanumeric ASCII characters (e.g. .QW a is the keysym for the ASCII character .QW a ), plus descriptions for non-alphanumeric characters .PQ comma "is the keysym for the comma character" , plus descriptions for all the non-ASCII keys on the keyboard (e.g. .QW Shift_L is the keysym for the left shift key, and .QW F1 is the keysym for the F1 function key, if it exists). The complete list of keysyms is not presented here; it is available in other X documentation and may vary from system to system. If necessary, you can use the \fB%K\fR notation described below to print out the keysym name for a particular key. If a keysym \fIdetail\fR is given, then the \fItype\fR field may be omitted; it will default to \fBKeyPress\fR. For example, \fB<Control\-comma>\fR is equivalent to \fB<Control\-KeyPress\-comma>\fR. .SH "BINDING SCRIPTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS" .PP The \fIscript\fR argument to \fBbind\fR is a Tcl script, called the .QW "binding script", which will be executed whenever the given event sequence occurs. \fICommand\fR will be executed in the same interpreter that the \fBbind\fR command was executed in, and it will run at global |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
430 431 432 433 434 435 436 | formatted as a hexadecimal number. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR events. Indicates the sibling window immediately below the receiving window in the stacking order, or \fB0\fR if the receiving window is at the bottom. .IP \fB%b\fR 5 The number of the button that was pressed or released. Valid only | | | 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 | formatted as a hexadecimal number. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR events. Indicates the sibling window immediately below the receiving window in the stacking order, or \fB0\fR if the receiving window is at the bottom. .IP \fB%b\fR 5 The number of the button that was pressed or released. Valid only for \fBButtonPress\fR and \fBButtonRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%c\fR 5 The \fIcount\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBExpose\fR events. Indicates that there are \fIcount\fR pending \fBExpose\fR events which have not yet been delivered to the window. .IP \fB%d\fR 5 The \fIdetail\fR or \fIuser_data\fR field from the event. The \fB%d\fR is replaced by |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
477 478 479 480 481 482 483 | \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. Indicates the new or requested height of the window. .IP \fB%i\fR 5 The \fIwindow\fR field from the event, represented as a hexadecimal integer. Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%k\fR 5 | | | | | 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 | \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. Indicates the new or requested height of the window. .IP \fB%i\fR 5 The \fIwindow\fR field from the event, represented as a hexadecimal integer. Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%k\fR 5 The \fIkeycode\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%m\fR 5 The \fImode\fR field from the event. The substituted string is one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or \fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR. Valid only for \fBEnter\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, \fBFocusOut\fR, and \fBLeave\fR events. .IP \fB%o\fR 5 The \fIoverride_redirect\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBMap\fR, \fBReparent\fR, and \fBConfigure\fR events. .IP \fB%p\fR 5 The \fIplace\fR field from the event, substituted as one of the strings \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR. Valid only for \fBCirculate\fR and \fBCirculateRequest\fR events. .IP \fB%s\fR 5 The \fIstate\fR field from the event. For \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events, a decimal string is substituted. For \fBVisibility\fR, one of the strings \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR, \fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, and \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR is substituted. For \fBProperty\fR events, substituted with either the string \fBNewValue\fR (indicating that the property has been created or modified) or \fBDelete\fR (indicating that |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
515 516 517 518 519 520 521 | The \fIwidth\fR field from the event. Indicates the new or requested width of the window. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. .IP "\fB%x\fR, \fB%y\fR" 5 The \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR fields from the event. | | | | | | | | 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 | The \fIwidth\fR field from the event. Indicates the new or requested width of the window. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. .IP "\fB%x\fR, \fB%y\fR" 5 The \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR fields from the event. For \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, and \fBMouseWheel\fR events, \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR indicate the position of the mouse pointer relative to the receiving window. For key events on the Macintosh these are the coordinates of the mouse at the moment when an X11 KeyEvent is sent to Tk, which could be slightly later than the time of the physical press or release. For \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events, the position where the mouse pointer crossed the window, relative to the receiving window. For \fBConfigure\fR and \fBCreate\fR requests, the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates of the window relative to its parent window. .IP \fB%A\fR 5 Substitutes the UNICODE character corresponding to the event, or the empty string if the event does not correspond to a UNICODE character (e.g. the shift key was pressed). On X11, \fBXmbLookupString\fR (or \fBXLookupString\fR when input method support is turned off) does all the work of translating from the event to a UNICODE character. On X11, valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR event. On Windows and macOS/aqua, valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%B\fR 5 The \fIborder_width\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, and \fBCreate\fR events. .IP \fB%D\fR 5 This reports the \fIdelta\fR value of a \fBMouseWheel\fR event. The \fIdelta\fR value represents the rotation units the mouse wheel has been moved. The sign of the value represents the direction the mouse wheel was scrolled. .IP \fB%E\fR 5 The \fIsend_event\fR field from the event. Valid for all event types. \fB0\fR indicates that this is a .QW normal event, \fB1\fR indicates that it is a .QW synthetic event generated by \fBSendEvent\fR. .IP \fB%K\fR 5 The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a textual string. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%M\fR 5 The number of script-based binding patterns matched so far for the event. Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%N\fR 5 The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a decimal number. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%P\fR 5 The name of the property being updated or deleted (which may be converted to an XAtom using \fBwinfo atom\fR.) Valid only for \fBProperty\fR events. .IP \fB%R\fR 5 The \fIroot\fR window identifier from the event. Valid only for events containing a \fIroot\fR field. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
579 580 581 582 583 584 585 | The path name of the window to which the event was reported (the \fIwindow\fR field from the event). Valid for all event types. .IP "\fB%X\fR, \fB%Y\fR" 5 The \fIx_root\fR and \fIy_root\fR fields from the event. If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted values are the corresponding x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the virtual root. Valid only for | | | 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 | The path name of the window to which the event was reported (the \fIwindow\fR field from the event). Valid for all event types. .IP "\fB%X\fR, \fB%Y\fR" 5 The \fIx_root\fR and \fIy_root\fR fields from the event. If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted values are the corresponding x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the virtual root. Valid only for \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBLeave\fR and \fBMotion\fR events. Same meaning as \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR, except relative to the (virtual) root window. .LP The replacement string for a %-replacement is formatted as a proper Tcl list element. This means that spaces or special characters such as \fB$\fR and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
646 647 648 649 650 651 652 | The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of several matching sequences is more specific: .RS .IP (a) an event pattern that specifies a specific button or key is more specific than one that does not; .IP (b) | | | < | 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 | The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of several matching sequences is more specific: .RS .IP (a) an event pattern that specifies a specific button or key is more specific than one that does not; .IP (b) a longer sequence (in terms of number of events matched) is more specific than a shorter sequence; .IP (c) if the modifiers specified in one pattern are a subset of the modifiers in another pattern, then the pattern with more modifiers is more specific; .IP (d) a virtual event whose physical pattern matches the sequence is less specific than the same physical pattern that is not associated with a |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
692 693 694 695 696 697 698 | An unbound event is not considered to be an error. .SH "MULTI-EVENT SEQUENCES AND IGNORED EVENTS" .PP When a \fIsequence\fR specified in a \fBbind\fR command contains more than one event pattern, then its script is executed whenever the recent events (leading up to and including the current event) match the given sequence. This means, for example, that if button 1 is | | | | | | | | 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 | An unbound event is not considered to be an error. .SH "MULTI-EVENT SEQUENCES AND IGNORED EVENTS" .PP When a \fIsequence\fR specified in a \fBbind\fR command contains more than one event pattern, then its script is executed whenever the recent events (leading up to and including the current event) match the given sequence. This means, for example, that if button 1 is clicked repeatedly the sequence \fB<Double\-ButtonPress\-1>\fR will match each button press but the first. If extraneous events that would prevent a match occur in the middle of an event sequence then the extraneous events are ignored unless they are \fBKeyPress\fR or \fBButtonPress\fR events. For example, \fB<Double\-ButtonPress\-1>\fR will match a sequence of presses of button 1, even though there will be \fBButtonRelease\fR events (and possibly \fBMotion\fR events) between the \fBButtonPress\fR events. Furthermore, a \fBKeyPress\fR event may be preceded by any number of other \fBKeyPress\fR events for modifier keys without the modifier keys preventing a match. For example, the event sequence \fBaB\fR will match a press of the \fBa\fR key, a release of the \fBa\fR key, a press of the \fBShift\fR key, and a press of the \fBb\fR key: the press of \fBShift\fR is ignored because it is a modifier key. Finally, if several \fBMotion\fR events occur in a row, only the last one is used for purposes of matching binding sequences. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/bitmap.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
86 87 88 89 90 91 92 | .PP When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 | .PP When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS \fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for bitmap images: .TP \fIimageName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/busy.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 | '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME | | < < | | | 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 | '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH busy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME busy \- confine pointer events to a window sub-tree .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk busy\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .sp \fBtk busy hold\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .sp \fBtk busy configure \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... .sp \fBtk busy forget\fR \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow \fR?... .sp \fBtk busy current\fR ?\fIpattern\fR? .sp \fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtk busy\fR command provides a simple means to block pointer events from Tk widgets, while overriding the widget's cursor with a configurable busy cursor. Note this command does not prevent keyboard events from being sent to the widgets made busy. .SH INTRODUCTION .PP There are many times in applications where you want to temporarily restrict what actions the user can take. For example, an application could have a .QW Run |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | .PP The following operations are available for the \fBtk busy\fR command: .TP \fBtk busy \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... . Shortcut for \fBtk busy hold\fR command. .TP | | > > | > | > > > > > | > > > > > | 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 | .PP The following operations are available for the \fBtk busy\fR command: .TP \fBtk busy \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... . Shortcut for \fBtk busy hold\fR command. .TP \fBtk busy hold \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoption value\fR?... . Makes the specified \fIwindow\fR (and its descendants in the Tk window hierarchy) appear busy. \fIWindow\fR must be a valid path name of a Tk widget. A transparent window is put in front of the specified window. This transparent window is mapped the next time idle tasks are processed, and the specified window and its descendants will be blocked from user interactions. Normally \fBupdate\fR should be called immediately afterward to insure that the hold operation is in effect before the application starts its processing. The following configuration options are valid: .RS .TP \fB\-cursor \fIcursorName\fR . Specifies the cursor to be displayed when the widget is made busy. \fICursorName\fR can be in any form accepted by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The default cursor is \fBwait\fR on Windows and \fBwatch\fR on other platforms. .RE .TP \fBtk busy cget \fIwindow\fR \fIoption\fR . Queries the \fBtk busy\fR command configuration options for \fIwindow\fR. \fIWindow\fR must be the path name of a widget previously made busy by the \fBhold\fR operation. The command returns the present value of the specified \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
166 167 168 169 170 171 172 | .PP .CS option add *frame.busyCursor gumby option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby .CE .RE .TP | < < < < < < | < < < < < < < | < > | < < < < < < < < | | | > | > > > > > > > > > > > > > | | | 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 |
.PP
.CS
option add *frame.busyCursor gumby
option add *Frame.BusyCursor gumby
.CE
.RE
.TP
\fBtk busy forget \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindow\fR?...
.
Releases resources allocated by the \fBtk busy\fR command for \fIwindow\fR,
including the transparent window. User events will again be received by
\fIwindow\fR. Resources are also released when \fIwindow\fR is destroyed.
\fIWindow\fR must be the name of a widget specified in the \fBhold\fR
operation, otherwise an error is reported.
.TP
\fBtk busy current \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
.
Returns the pathnames of all widgets that are currently busy. If a
\fIpattern\fR is given, only the path names of busy widgets matching
\fIpattern\fR are returned.
.TP
\fBtk busy status \fIwindow\fR
.
Returns the status of a widget \fIwindow\fR. If \fIwindow\fR presently can not
receive user interactions, \fB1\fR is returned, otherwise \fB0\fR.
.SH "EVENT HANDLING"
.SS BINDINGS
.PP
The event blocking feature is implemented by creating and mapping a
transparent window that completely covers the widget. When the busy window is
mapped, it invisibly shields the widget and its hierarchy from all events that
may be sent. Like Tk widgets, busy windows have widget names in the Tk window
hierarchy. This means that you can use the \fBbind\fR command, to handle
events in the busy window.
.PP
.CS
\fBtk busy\fR hold .frame.canvas
bind .frame.canvas_Busy <Enter> { ... }
.CE
.PP
Normally the busy window is a sibling of the widget. The name of the busy
window is
.QW \fIwidget\fB_Busy\fR
where \fIwidget\fR is the name of the widget to be made busy. In the previous
example, the pathname of the busy window is
.QW \fB.frame.canvas_Busy\fR .
The exception is when the widget is a toplevel widget (such as
.QW . )
where the busy window can't be made a sibling. The busy window is then a child
of the widget named
.QW \fIwidget\fB._Busy\fR
where \fIwidget\fR is the name of the toplevel widget. In the following
example, the pathname of the busy window is
.QW \fB._Busy\fR .
.PP
.CS
\fBtk busy\fR hold .
bind ._Busy <Enter> { ... }
.CE
.SS "ENTER/LEAVE EVENTS"
.PP
Mapping and unmapping busy windows generates Enter/Leave events for all
widgets they cover. Please note this if you are tracking Enter/Leave events in
widgets.
.SS "KEYBOARD EVENTS"
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/button.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for button widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/canvas.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
216 217 218 219 220 221 222 | It is possible to adjust the origin of the canvas coordinate system relative to the origin of the window using the \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR widget commands; this is typically used for scrolling. Canvases do not support scaling or rotation of the canvas coordinate system relative to the window coordinate system. .PP | | < < < < | | 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 | It is possible to adjust the origin of the canvas coordinate system relative to the origin of the window using the \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR widget commands; this is typically used for scrolling. Canvases do not support scaling or rotation of the canvas coordinate system relative to the window coordinate system. .PP Individual items may be moved or scaled using widget commands described below, but they may not be rotated. .PP Note that the default origin of the canvas's visible area is coincident with the origin for the whole window as that makes bindings using the mouse position easier to work with; you only need to use the \fBcanvasx\fR and \fBcanvasy\fR widget commands if you adjust the origin of the visible area. However, this also means that any focus ring (as controlled by the \fB\-highlightthickness\fR option) and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
313 314 315 316 317 318 319 | .PP The second possible syntax is a character list containing only 5 possible characters .QW "\fB.,-_ \fR" . The space can be used to enlarge the space between other line elements, and cannot occur as the first position in the string. Some examples: | < | 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 |
.PP
The second possible syntax is a character list containing only
5 possible characters
.QW "\fB.,-_ \fR" .
The space can be used
to enlarge the space between other line elements, and cannot
occur as the first position in the string. Some examples:
.CS
\-dash . \(-> \-dash {2 4}
\-dash - \(-> \-dash {6 4}
\-dash -. \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4}
\-dash -.. \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4 2 4}
\-dash {. } \(-> \-dash {2 8}
\-dash , \(-> \-dash {4 4}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcanvas\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | | 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcanvas\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following widget commands are possible for canvas widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBaddtag \fItag searchSpec \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . For each item that meets the constraints specified by \fIsearchSpec\fR and the \fIarg\fRs, add \fItag\fR to the list of tags associated with the item if it is not already present on that list. It is possible that no items will satisfy the constraints given by \fIsearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fRs, in which case the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
466 467 468 469 470 471 472 | If both \fIcommand\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagOrId\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, | | | 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 | If both \fIcommand\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagOrId\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR) or virtual events. The handling of events in canvases uses the current item defined in \fBITEM IDS AND TAGS\fR above. \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events trigger for an item when it becomes the current item or ceases to be the current item; note that these events are different than \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events for windows. Mouse-related events are directed to the current item, if any. Keyboard-related events are directed to the focus item, if |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
598 599 600 601 602 603 604 | tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those associated with the item. If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then the item is unaffected by the command. If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP | | | 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 | tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those associated with the item. If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then the item is unaffected by the command. If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBfind \fIsearchCommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command returns a list consisting of all the items that meet the constraints specified by \fIsearchCommand\fR and \fIarg\fR's. \fISearchCommand\fR and \fIargs\fR have any of the forms accepted by the \fBaddtag\fR command. The items are returned in stacking order, with the lowest item first. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
659 660 661 662 663 664 665 | legal forms for \fIindex\fR. Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget command, above), but the cursor position may be set even when the item does not have the focus. This command returns an empty string. .TP | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | > | 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 | legal forms for \fIindex\fR. Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the \fBfocus\fR widget command, above), but the cursor position may be set even when the item does not have the focus. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBimove \fItagOrId index x y\fR .VS 8.6 This command causes the \fIindex\fR'th coordinate of each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be relocated to the location (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR). Each item interprets \fIindex\fR independently according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, only line and polygon items may have their coordinates relocated this way. .VE 8.6 .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fItagOrId index\fR . This command returns a decimal string giving the numerical index within \fItagOrId\fR corresponding to \fIindex\fR. \fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of the desired position as described in \fBINDICES\fR above. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
765 766 767 768 769 770 771 | Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of each point associated with the item. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR | | > | 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 | Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of each point associated with the item. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBmoveto \fItagOrId xPos yPos\fR .VS 8.6 Move the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space so that the first coordinate pair (the upper-left corner of the bounding box) of the first item (the lowest in the display list) with tag \fItagOrId\fR is located at position (\fIxPos\fR,\fIyPos\fR). \fIxPos\fR and \fIyPos\fR may be the empty string, in which case the corresponding coordinate will be unchanged. All items matching \fItagOrId\fR remain in the same positions relative to each other. This command returns an empty string. .VE 8.6 .TP \fIpathName \fBpostscript \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? . Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas. If the \fB\-file\fR option is specified then the Postscript is written to a file and an empty string is returned; otherwise the Postscript is returned as the result of the command. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
960 961 962 963 964 965 966 | Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the \fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 | Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is determined by the \fBraise\fR command and \fBlower\fR command, not the \fBraise\fR widget command and \fBlower\fR widget command for canvases. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBrchars \fItagOrId first last string\fR .VS 8.6 This command causes the text or coordinates between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR for each of the items indicated by \fItagOrId\fR to be replaced by \fIstring\fR. Each item interprets \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR independently according to the rules described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Out of the standard set of items, text items support this operation by altering their text as directed, and line and polygon items support this operation by altering their coordinate list (in which case \fIstring\fR should be a list of coordinates to use as a replacement). The other items ignore this operation. .VE 8.6 .TP \fIpathName \fBscale \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin xScale yScale\fR . Rescale the coordinates of all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas coordinate space. \fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the scaling operation and \fIxScale\fR and \fIyScale\fR identify the scale |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 | total width of the canvas is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | > > > < < < | 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 | total width of the canvas is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero, or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise. If \fIwhat is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's width. If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right becomes visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview ?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the information displayed in the canvas's window. It can take any of the following forms: |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 | \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. | | > > > < < < | 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 | \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down in units of the \fByScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero, or in units of one-tenth the window's height otherwise. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's height. If \fInumber\fR is negative then higher information becomes visible; if it is positive then lower information becomes visible. .RE .SH "OVERVIEW OF ITEM TYPES" .PP The sections below describe the various types of items supported by canvas widgets. Each item type is characterized by two things: first, the form of the \fBcreate\fR command used to create instances of the type; and second, a set of configuration options |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 | \fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR . Specifies the color to be used to fill item's area. | | > | 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 | \fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR . Specifies the color to be used to fill item's area. in its normal, active, and disabled states. The even-odd fill rule is used. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. For the line item, it specifies the color of the line drawn. For the text item, it specifies the foreground color of the text. If \fIcolor\fR is an empty string (the default for all canvas items except line and text), then the item will not be filled. .TP \fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 | For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the arc's region. .SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES" .SS "ARC ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions. An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified | | | | < < | 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 | For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the arc's region. .SH "STANDARD ITEM TYPES" .SS "ARC ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions. An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified by the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options) and displayed in one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR option). Arcs are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular region enclosing the oval that defines the arc. After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. An arc item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that would be painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were non-empty. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 | modulo 360 is used as the extent. .TP \fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the arc. \fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative. | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 | modulo 360 is used as the extent. .TP \fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the arc. \fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative. .TP \fB\-style \fItype\fR Specifies how to draw the arc. If \fItype\fR is \fBpieslice\fR (the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center of the oval and each end of the perimeter section. If \fItype\fR is \fBchord\fR then the arc's region is defined |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 | and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment. If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight | | | 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 | and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment. If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is not the second point of a pair of control points, the point is repeated (one or two times) so that it also becomes the second point of a pair of control points (the associated knot point will be the first control point). .TP \fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 | \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for text items: .TP \fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR | | > | 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 | \fB\-stipple\fR \fB\-activestipple\fR \fB\-disabledstipple\fR \fB\-state\fR \fB\-tags\fR .DE The following extra options are supported for text items: .TP \fB\-angle \fIrotationDegrees\fR .VS 8.6 \fIRotationDegrees\fR tells how many degrees to rotate the text anticlockwise about the positioning point for the text; it may have any floating-point value from 0.0 to 360.0. For example, if \fIrotationDegrees\fR is \fB90\fR, then the text will be drawn vertically from bottom to top. This option defaults to \fB0.0\fR. .VE 8.6 .TP \fB\-font \fIfontName\fR Specifies the font to use for the text item. \fIFontName\fR may be any string acceptable to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. If this option is not specified, it defaults to a system-dependent font. .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/checkbutton.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
188 189 190 191 192 193 194 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcheckbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcheckbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for checkbutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/clipboard.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH clipboard n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME clipboard \- Manipulate Tk clipboard .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH clipboard n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME clipboard \- Manipulate Tk clipboard .SH SYNOPSIS \fBclipboard \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command provides a Tcl interface to the Tk clipboard, which stores data for later retrieval using the selection mechanism (via the \fB\-selection CLIPBOARD\fR option). In order to copy data into the clipboard, \fBclipboard clear\fR must |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/colors.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
915 916 917 918 919 920 921 | \fBWindows\fR . On Windows, the following additional system colors are available (note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme): .RS .DS .ta 6c | | | | | | | | | | < | 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 | \fBWindows\fR . On Windows, the following additional system colors are available (note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme): .RS .DS .ta 6c system3dDarkShadow systemHighlight system3dLight systemHighlightText systemActiveBorder systemInactiveBorder systemActiveCaption systemInactiveCaption systemAppWorkspace systemInactiveCaptionText systemBackground systemInfoBackground systemButtonFace systemInfoText systemButtonHighlight systemMenu systemButtonShadow systemMenuText systemButtonText systemScrollbar systemCaptionText systemWindow systemDisabledText systemWindowFrame systemGrayText systemWindowText .DE .RE .SH "SEE ALSO" options(n), Tk_GetColor(3) .SH KEYWORDS color, option '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/entry.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | \-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertofftime \-takefocus \-font \-insertontime \-textvariable \-foreground \-insertwidth \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-justify \-highlightcolor \-relief | < | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | \-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertofftime \-takefocus \-font \-insertontime \-textvariable \-foreground \-insertwidth \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-justify \-highlightcolor \-relief .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-disabledbackground disabledBackground DisabledBackground Specifies the background color to use when the entry is disabled. If this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used. .OP \-disabledforeground disabledForeground DisabledForeground Specifies the foreground color to use when the entry is disabled. If |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
186 187 188 189 190 191 192 | entry widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBentry\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 | entry widget to become out of sync with the \fB\-textvariable\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBentry\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName subcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fISubcommand\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .SS INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for entries take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the entry's |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
399 400 401 402 403 404 405 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | > > | | | < < | 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for entries that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word refers to a contiguous group of letters, digits, or |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/event.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH event n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME event \- Miscellaneous event facilities: define virtual events and generate events .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH event n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME event \- Miscellaneous event facilities: define virtual events and generate events .SH SYNOPSIS \fBevent\fI option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBevent\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with window system events, such as defining virtual events and synthesizing events. The command has several different forms, determined by the first argument. The following forms are currently supported: |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIborder_width\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%B\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-button\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIdetail\fR field | | | 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 | \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIborder_width\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%B\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-button\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIdetail\fR field for a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, overriding any button number provided in the base \fIevent\fR argument. Corresponds to the \fB%b\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-count\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIcount\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBExpose\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%c\fR substitution for binding scripts. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
151 152 153 154 155 156 157 | \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIheight\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%h\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-keycode\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIkeycode\fR field for the event. | | | | 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 | \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIheight\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%h\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-keycode\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIkeycode\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%k\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-keysym\fI name\fR \fIName\fR must be the name of a valid keysym, such as \fBg\fR, \fBspace\fR, or \fBReturn\fR; its corresponding keycode value is used as the \fIkeycode\fR field for event, overriding any detail specified in the base \fIevent\fR argument. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%K\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-mode\fI notify\fR \fINotify\fR specifies the \fImode\fR field for the event and must be one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or \fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR. Valid for \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
185 186 187 188 189 190 191 | either \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR. Valid for \fBCirculate\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%p\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-root\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR must be either a window path name or an integer window identifier; it specifies the \fIroot\fR field for the event. | | | | | | | | | 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 | either \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR. Valid for \fBCirculate\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%p\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-root\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR must be either a window path name or an integer window identifier; it specifies the \fIroot\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%R\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-rootx\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIx_root\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-rooty\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIy_root\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-sendevent\fI boolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR must be a boolean value; it specifies the \fIsend_event\fR field for the event. Valid for all events. Corresponds to the \fB%E\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-serial\fI number\fR \fINumber\fR must be an integer; it specifies the \fIserial\fR field for the event. Valid for all events. Corresponds to the \fB%#\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-state\fI state\fR \fIState\fR specifies the \fIstate\fR field for the event. For \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events it must be an integer value. For \fBVisibility\fR events it must be one of \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR, \fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, or \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR. This option overrides any modifiers such as \fBMeta\fR or \fBControl\fR specified in the base \fIevent\fR. Corresponds to the \fB%s\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-subwindow\fI window\fR \fIWindow\fR specifies the \fIsubwindow\fR field for the event, either as a path name for a Tk widget or as an integer window identifier. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Similar to \fB%S\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-time\fI integer\fR \fIInteger\fR must be an integer value; it specifies the \fItime\fR field for the event. Additonally the special value \fBcurrent\fR is allowed, this value will be substituted by the current event time. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBProperty\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%t\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-warp\fI boolean\fR \fIboolean\fR must be a boolean value; it specifies whether the screen pointer should be warped as well. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. The pointer will only warp to a window if it is mapped. .TP \fB\-width\fI size\fR \fISize\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIwidth\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBConfigure\fR events. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
278 279 280 281 282 283 284 | This option is useful when generating a series of events that should be processed in order but at the front of the queue. .RE .TP \fB\-x\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIx\fR field for the event. | | | | 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 | This option is useful when generating a series of events that should be processed in order but at the front of the queue. .RE .TP \fB\-x\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIx\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%x\fR substitution for binding scripts. If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%X\fR substitution for binding scripts. .TP \fB\-y\fI coord\fR \fICoord\fR must be a screen distance; it specifies the \fIy\fR field for the event. Valid for \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBExpose\fR, \fBConfigure\fR, \fBGravity\fR, and \fBReparent\fR events. Corresponds to the \fB%y\fR substitution for binding scripts. If \fIWindow\fR is empty the coordinate is relative to the screen, and this option corresponds to the \fB%Y\fR substitution for binding scripts. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 | This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is changed. .TP \fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR This is sent to all widgets when the ttk theme changed. The ttk widgets listen to this event and redisplay themselves when it fires. The legacy widgets ignore this event. .TP \fB<<TraverseIn>>\fR This is sent to a widget when the focus enters the widget because of a user-driven .QW "tab to widget" action. .TP | > > > > > > > > > | 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 | This is sent to a text widget when the selection in the widget is changed. .TP \fB<<ThemeChanged>>\fR This is sent to all widgets when the ttk theme changed. The ttk widgets listen to this event and redisplay themselves when it fires. The legacy widgets ignore this event. .TP \fB<<TkWorldChanged>>\fR . This event is sent to all widgets when a font is changed, for example, by the use of [font configure]. The user_data field (%d) will have the value "FontChanged". For other system wide changes, this event will be sent to all widgets, and the user_data field will indicate the cause of the change. NOTE: all tk and ttk widgets already handle this event internally. .TP \fB<<TraverseIn>>\fR This is sent to a widget when the focus enters the widget because of a user-driven .QW "tab to widget" action. .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
564 565 566 567 568 569 570 |
.PP
When a definition of a virtual event changes at run time, all windows
will respond immediately to the new definition.
Starting from the preceding example, if the following code is executed:
.PP
.CS
bind Entry <Control-y> {}
| | | 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 |
.PP
When a definition of a virtual event changes at run time, all windows
will respond immediately to the new definition.
Starting from the preceding example, if the following code is executed:
.PP
.CS
bind Entry <Control-y> {}
\fBevent add\fR <<Paste>> <Key-F6>
.CE
.PP
the behavior will change such in two ways. First, the shadowed
\fB<<Paste>>\fR binding will emerge.
Typing Control-y will no longer invoke the \fB<Control-y>\fR binding,
but instead invoke the virtual event \fB<<Paste>>\fR. Second,
pressing the F6 key will now also invoke the \fB<<Paste>>\fR binding.
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/focus.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 | '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME focus \- Manage the input focus .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBfocus\fR \fBfocus \fIwindow\fR | | | 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME focus \- Manage the input focus .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBfocus\fR \fBfocus \fIwindow\fR \fBfocus \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBfocus\fR command is used to manage the Tk input focus. At any given time, one window on each display is designated as the \fIfocus window\fR; any key press or key release events for the |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/font.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH font n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME font \- Create and inspect fonts. .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH font n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME font \- Create and inspect fonts. .SH SYNOPSIS \fBfont\fI option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBfont\fR command provides several facilities for dealing with fonts, such as defining named fonts and inspecting the actual attributes of a font. The command has several different forms, determined by the first argument. The following forms are currently supported: |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/fontchooser.n.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <[email protected]> '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH fontchooser n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME fontchooser \- control font selection dialog .SH SYNOPSIS | | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2008 Daniel A. Steffen <[email protected]> '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" .TH fontchooser n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME fontchooser \- control font selection dialog .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure\fR ?\fI\-option value \-option value ...\fR? .sp \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR .sp \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBhide\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command controls the Tk font selection dialog. It uses the native platform font selection dialog where available, or a dialog implemented in Tcl otherwise. .PP Unlike most of the other Tk dialog commands, \fBtk fontchooser\fR does not return an immediate result, as on some platforms (Mac OS X) the standard font dialog is modeless while on others (Windows) it is modal. To accommodate this difference, all user interaction with the dialog will be communicated to the caller via callbacks or virtual events. .PP The \fBtk fontchooser\fR command can have one of the following forms: .TP \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBconfigure \fR?\fI\-option value \-option value ...\fR? . Set or query one or more of the configurations options below (analogous to Tk widget configuration). .TP \fBtk fontchooser\fR \fBshow\fR . Show the font selection dialog. Depending on the platform, may return |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/frame.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option except that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background and border. | < < < < < < < < < < | 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option except that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background and border. .OP \-class class Class Specifies a class for the window. This class will be used when querying the option database for the window's other options, and it will also be used later for other purposes such as bindings. The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
68 69 70 71 72 73 74 | Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will not request any size at all. Note that this sets the total height of the frame, any \fB\-borderwidth\fR or similar is not added. Normally \fB\-height\fR should not be used if a propagating geometry manager, such as \fBgrid\fR or \fBpack\fR, is used within the frame since the geometry manager will override the height of the frame. | < < < < < < < < < | 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 | Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will not request any size at all. Note that this sets the total height of the frame, any \fB\-borderwidth\fR or similar is not added. Normally \fB\-height\fR should not be used if a propagating geometry manager, such as \fBgrid\fR or \fBpack\fR, is used within the frame since the geometry manager will override the height of the frame. .OP \-visual visual Visual Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR. If this option is not specified, the new window will use the same visual as its parent. The \fB\-visual\fR option may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
106 107 108 109 110 111 112 | or in the option database to configure aspects of the frame such as its background color and relief. The \fBframe\fR command returns the path name of the new window. .PP A frame is a simple widget. Its primary purpose is to act as a spacer or container for complex window layouts. The only features | | | | 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 | or in the option database to configure aspects of the frame such as its background color and relief. The \fBframe\fR command returns the path name of the new window. .PP A frame is a simple widget. Its primary purpose is to act as a spacer or container for complex window layouts. The only features of a frame are its background color and an optional 3-D border to make the frame appear raised or sunken. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the frame's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .PP .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE .PP \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the frame widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for frame widgets: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/grab.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree .SH SYNOPSIS \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR .sp | | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree .SH SYNOPSIS \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR .sp \fBgrab \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg \fR...? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command implements simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk. Tk's grabs are different than the grabs described in the Xlib documentation. When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/grid.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
173 174 175 176 177 178 179 | .TP \fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR . If a content's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the content within its cell. \fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR. | | | 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 | .TP \fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR . If a content's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the content within its cell. \fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR. The string can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored. Each letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the content will .QW stick to. If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR) are specified, the content will be stretched to fill the entire height (or width) of its cavity. The \fB\-sticky\fR option subsumes the combination of \fB\-anchor\fR and \fB\-fill\fR that is used by \fBpack\fR. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 | . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial default settings are used. | < < < < < < < < | 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 | . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial default settings are used. .TP \fBgrid info \fIwindow\fR . Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the content given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
239 240 241 242 243 244 245 | \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIwindow\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBgrid rowconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR? . Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the | | | 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 | \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIwindow\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBgrid rowconfigure \fIwindow index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR? . Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the geometry window, \fIwindow\fR. The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR and \fB\-pad\fR. If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as a list of row indices to which the configuration options will operate on. Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR the options apply to all rows currently occupied by content windows. For a window name, that window must be a content window of this container and the options |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
281 282 283 284 285 286 287 | . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. However, the configuration options for that window are remembered, so that if the content window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous values are retained. | < < < < < < < < | | > | | > | 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 | . Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from grid for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. However, the configuration options for that window are remembered, so that if the content window is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous values are retained. .TP \fBgrid size \fIcontainer\fR . Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fIcontainer\fR. The size is determined either by the \fIcontent\fR occupying the largest row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, or \fB\-pad\fR that is non-zero. .TP \fBgrid slaves \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR? . If no options are supplied, a list of all of the content in \fIwindow\fR are returned, most recently managed first. \fIOption\fR can be either \fB\-row\fR or \fB\-column\fR which causes only the content in the row (or column) specified by \fIvalue\fR to be returned. .VS "TIP 581" .TP \fBgrid content \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR? . Synonym for \fBgrid slaves \fIwindow\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR?. .VE "TIP 581" .SH "RELATIVE PLACEMENT" .PP The \fBgrid\fR command contains a limited set of capabilities that permit layouts to be created without specifying the row and column information for each content. This permits content to be rearranged, added, or removed without the need to explicitly specify row and column information. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/image.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME image \- Create and manipulate images .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH image n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME image \- Create and manipulate images .SH SYNOPSIS \fBimage\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBimage\fR command is used to create, delete, and query images. It can take several different forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/keysyms.n.
1 | '\" | | | 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | '\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" .TH keysyms n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 | ugrave 249 0xF9 uacute 250 0xFA ucircumflex 251 0xFB udiaeresis 252 0xFC yacute 253 0xFD thorn 254 0xFE ydiaeresis 255 0xFF Aogonek 417 0x1A1 breve 418 0x1A2 Lstroke 419 0x1A3 Lcaron 421 0x1A5 Sacute 422 0x1A6 Scaron 425 0x1A9 Scedilla 426 0x1AA Tcaron 427 0x1AB Zacute 428 0x1AC | > > < < | 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 | ugrave 249 0xF9 uacute 250 0xFA ucircumflex 251 0xFB udiaeresis 252 0xFC yacute 253 0xFD thorn 254 0xFE ydiaeresis 255 0xFF .CE .CS Aogonek 417 0x1A1 breve 418 0x1A2 Lstroke 419 0x1A3 Lcaron 421 0x1A5 Sacute 422 0x1A6 Scaron 425 0x1A9 Scedilla 426 0x1AA Tcaron 427 0x1AB Zacute 428 0x1AC Zcaron 430 0x1AE Zabovedot 431 0x1AF aogonek 433 0x1B1 ogonek 434 0x1B2 lstroke 435 0x1B3 lcaron 437 0x1B5 sacute 438 0x1B6 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 | kana_RU 1241 0x4D9 kana_RE 1242 0x4DA kana_RO 1243 0x4DB kana_WA 1244 0x4DC kana_N 1245 0x4DD voicedsound 1246 0x4DE semivoicedsound 1247 0x4DF Arabic_comma 1452 0x5AC Arabic_semicolon 1467 0x5BB Arabic_question_mark 1471 0x5BF Arabic_hamza 1473 0x5C1 Arabic_maddaonalef 1474 0x5C2 Arabic_hamzaonalef 1475 0x5C3 Arabic_hamzaonwaw 1476 0x5C4 | > > | 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 | kana_RU 1241 0x4D9 kana_RE 1242 0x4DA kana_RO 1243 0x4DB kana_WA 1244 0x4DC kana_N 1245 0x4DD voicedsound 1246 0x4DE semivoicedsound 1247 0x4DF .CE .CS Arabic_comma 1452 0x5AC Arabic_semicolon 1467 0x5BB Arabic_question_mark 1471 0x5BF Arabic_hamza 1473 0x5C1 Arabic_maddaonalef 1474 0x5C2 Arabic_hamzaonalef 1475 0x5C3 Arabic_hamzaonwaw 1476 0x5C4 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
425 426 427 428 429 430 431 | Arabic_ghain 1498 0x5DA Arabic_tatweel 1504 0x5E0 Arabic_feh 1505 0x5E1 Arabic_qaf 1506 0x5E2 Arabic_kaf 1507 0x5E3 Arabic_lam 1508 0x5E4 Arabic_meem 1509 0x5E5 | < < | 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 | Arabic_ghain 1498 0x5DA Arabic_tatweel 1504 0x5E0 Arabic_feh 1505 0x5E1 Arabic_qaf 1506 0x5E2 Arabic_kaf 1507 0x5E3 Arabic_lam 1508 0x5E4 Arabic_meem 1509 0x5E5 Arabic_noon 1510 0x5E6 Arabic_ha 1511 0x5E7 Arabic_waw 1512 0x5E8 Arabic_alefmaksura 1513 0x5E9 Arabic_yeh 1514 0x5EA Arabic_fathatan 1515 0x5EB Arabic_dammatan 1516 0x5EC |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 | Cyrillic_CHE 1790 0x6FE Cyrillic_HARDSIGN 1791 0x6FF Greek_ALPHAaccent 1953 0x7A1 Greek_EPSILONaccent 1954 0x7A2 Greek_ETAaccent 1955 0x7A3 Greek_IOTAaccent 1956 0x7A4 Greek_IOTAdieresis 1957 0x7A5 Greek_OMICRONaccent 1959 0x7A7 Greek_UPSILONaccent 1960 0x7A8 Greek_UPSILONdieresis 1961 0x7A9 Greek_OMEGAaccent 1963 0x7AB Greek_accentdieresis 1966 0x7AE Greek_horizbar 1967 0x7AF Greek_alphaaccent 1969 0x7B1 Greek_epsilonaccent 1970 0x7B2 Greek_etaaccent 1971 0x7B3 Greek_iotaaccent 1972 0x7B4 | > > | 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 | Cyrillic_CHE 1790 0x6FE Cyrillic_HARDSIGN 1791 0x6FF Greek_ALPHAaccent 1953 0x7A1 Greek_EPSILONaccent 1954 0x7A2 Greek_ETAaccent 1955 0x7A3 Greek_IOTAaccent 1956 0x7A4 Greek_IOTAdieresis 1957 0x7A5 Greek_IOTAaccentdiaeresis 1958 0x7A6 Greek_OMICRONaccent 1959 0x7A7 Greek_UPSILONaccent 1960 0x7A8 Greek_UPSILONdieresis 1961 0x7A9 Greek_UPSILONaccentdieresis 1962 0x7AA Greek_OMEGAaccent 1963 0x7AB Greek_accentdieresis 1966 0x7AE Greek_horizbar 1967 0x7AF Greek_alphaaccent 1969 0x7B1 Greek_epsilonaccent 1970 0x7B2 Greek_etaaccent 1971 0x7B3 Greek_iotaaccent 1972 0x7B4 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 | Greek_finalsmallsigma 2035 0x7F3 Greek_tau 2036 0x7F4 Greek_upsilon 2037 0x7F5 Greek_phi 2038 0x7F6 Greek_chi 2039 0x7F7 Greek_psi 2040 0x7F8 Greek_omega 2041 0x7F9 leftradical 2209 0x8A1 topleftradical 2210 0x8A2 horizconnector 2211 0x8A3 topintegral 2212 0x8A4 botintegral 2213 0x8A5 vertconnector 2214 0x8A6 topleftsqbracket 2215 0x8A7 | > > | 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 | Greek_finalsmallsigma 2035 0x7F3 Greek_tau 2036 0x7F4 Greek_upsilon 2037 0x7F5 Greek_phi 2038 0x7F6 Greek_chi 2039 0x7F7 Greek_psi 2040 0x7F8 Greek_omega 2041 0x7F9 .CE .CS leftradical 2209 0x8A1 topleftradical 2210 0x8A2 horizconnector 2211 0x8A3 topintegral 2212 0x8A4 botintegral 2213 0x8A5 vertconnector 2214 0x8A6 topleftsqbracket 2215 0x8A7 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
629 630 631 632 633 634 635 | topleftsummation 2225 0x8B1 botleftsummation 2226 0x8B2 topvertsummationconnector 2227 0x8B3 botvertsummationconnector 2228 0x8B4 toprightsummation 2229 0x8B5 botrightsummation 2230 0x8B6 rightmiddlesummation 2231 0x8B7 | < < | 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 | topleftsummation 2225 0x8B1 botleftsummation 2226 0x8B2 topvertsummationconnector 2227 0x8B3 botvertsummationconnector 2228 0x8B4 toprightsummation 2229 0x8B5 botrightsummation 2230 0x8B6 rightmiddlesummation 2231 0x8B7 lessthanequal 2236 0x8BC notequal 2237 0x8BD greaterthanequal 2238 0x8BE integral 2239 0x8BF therefore 2240 0x8C0 variation 2241 0x8C1 infinity 2242 0x8C2 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 | hebrew_pe 3316 0xCF4 hebrew_finalzade 3317 0xCF5 hebrew_zade 3318 0xCF6 hebrew_qoph 3319 0xCF7 hebrew_resh 3320 0xCF8 hebrew_shin 3321 0xCF9 hebrew_taw 3322 0xCFA Thai_kokai 3489 0xDA1 Thai_khokhai 3490 0xDA2 Thai_khokhuat 3491 0xDA3 Thai_khokhwai 3492 0xDA4 Thai_khokhon 3493 0xDA5 Thai_khorakhang 3494 0xDA6 Thai_ngongu 3495 0xDA7 | > > | 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 | hebrew_pe 3316 0xCF4 hebrew_finalzade 3317 0xCF5 hebrew_zade 3318 0xCF6 hebrew_qoph 3319 0xCF7 hebrew_resh 3320 0xCF8 hebrew_shin 3321 0xCF9 hebrew_taw 3322 0xCFA .CE .CS Thai_kokai 3489 0xDA1 Thai_khokhai 3490 0xDA2 Thai_khokhuat 3491 0xDA3 Thai_khokhwai 3492 0xDA4 Thai_khokhon 3493 0xDA5 Thai_khorakhang 3494 0xDA6 Thai_ngongu 3495 0xDA7 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
990 991 992 993 994 995 996 | Hangul_J_PanSios 3832 0xEF8 Hangul_J_KkogjiDalrinIeung 3833 0xEF9 Hangul_J_YeorinHieuh 3834 0xEFA Korean_Won 3839 0xEFF OE 5052 0x13BC oe 5053 0x13BD Ydiaeresis 5054 0x13BE | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < > | 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 | Hangul_J_PanSios 3832 0xEF8 Hangul_J_KkogjiDalrinIeung 3833 0xEF9 Hangul_J_YeorinHieuh 3834 0xEFA Korean_Won 3839 0xEFF OE 5052 0x13BC oe 5053 0x13BD Ydiaeresis 5054 0x13BE .CE .CS ISO_Lock 65025 0xFE01 ISO_Level2_Latch 65026 0xFE02 ISO_Level3_Shift 65027 0xFE03 ISO_Level3_Latch 65028 0xFE04 ISO_Level3_Lock 65029 0xFE05 ISO_Group_Latch 65030 0xFE06 ISO_Group_Lock 65031 0xFE07 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 | Pointer_Drag3 65271 0xFEF7 Pointer_Drag4 65272 0xFEF8 Pointer_EnableKeys 65273 0xFEF9 Pointer_Accelerate 65274 0xFEFA Pointer_DfltBtnNext 65275 0xFEFB Pointer_DfltBtnPrev 65276 0xFEFC Pointer_Drag5 65277 0xFEFD BackSpace 65288 0xFF08 Tab 65289 0xFF09 Linefeed 65290 0xFF0A Clear 65291 0xFF0B Return 65293 0xFF0D Pause 65299 0xFF13 Scroll_Lock 65300 0xFF14 | > > | 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 | Pointer_Drag3 65271 0xFEF7 Pointer_Drag4 65272 0xFEF8 Pointer_EnableKeys 65273 0xFEF9 Pointer_Accelerate 65274 0xFEFA Pointer_DfltBtnNext 65275 0xFEFB Pointer_DfltBtnPrev 65276 0xFEFC Pointer_Drag5 65277 0xFEFD .CE .CS BackSpace 65288 0xFF08 Tab 65289 0xFF09 Linefeed 65290 0xFF0A Clear 65291 0xFF0B Return 65293 0xFF0D Pause 65299 0xFF13 Scroll_Lock 65300 0xFF14 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 | Down 65364 0xFF54 Prior 65365 0xFF55 Next 65366 0xFF56 End 65367 0xFF57 Begin 65368 0xFF58 Win_L 65371 0xFF5B Win_R 65372 0xFF5C | < < | 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 | Down 65364 0xFF54 Prior 65365 0xFF55 Next 65366 0xFF56 End 65367 0xFF57 Begin 65368 0xFF58 Win_L 65371 0xFF5B Win_R 65372 0xFF5C App 65373 0xFF5D Select 65376 0xFF60 Print 65377 0xFF61 Execute 65378 0xFF62 Insert 65379 0xFF63 Undo 65381 0xFF65 Redo 65382 0xFF66 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 | braille_dot_5 65525 0xFFF5 braille_dot_6 65526 0xFFF6 braille_dot_7 65527 0xFFF7 braille_dot_8 65528 0xFFF8 braille_dot_9 65529 0xFFF9 braille_dot_10 65530 0xFFFA Delete 65535 0xFFFF | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 | braille_dot_5 65525 0xFFF5 braille_dot_6 65526 0xFFF6 braille_dot_7 65527 0xFFF7 braille_dot_8 65528 0xFFF8 braille_dot_9 65529 0xFFF9 braille_dot_10 65530 0xFFFA Delete 65535 0xFFFF .CE .CS SunFA_Grave 268828416 0x1005FF00 SunFA_Circum 268828417 0x1005FF01 SunFA_Tilde 268828418 0x1005FF02 SunFA_Acute 268828419 0x1005FF03 SunFA_Diaeresis 268828420 0x1005FF04 SunFA_Cedilla 268828421 0x1005FF05 SunF36 268828432 0x1005FF10 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 | SunAudioLowerVolume 268828535 0x1005FF77 SunAudioMute 268828536 0x1005FF78 SunAudioRaiseVolume 268828537 0x1005FF79 SunVideoDegauss 268828538 0x1005FF7A SunVideoLowerBrightness 268828539 0x1005FF7B SunVideoRaiseBrightness 268828540 0x1005FF7C SunPowerSwitchShift 268828541 0x1005FF7D XF86Switch_VT_1 269024769 0x1008FE01 XF86Switch_VT_2 269024770 0x1008FE02 XF86Switch_VT_3 269024771 0x1008FE03 XF86Switch_VT_4 269024772 0x1008FE04 XF86Switch_VT_5 269024773 0x1008FE05 XF86Switch_VT_6 269024774 0x1008FE06 XF86Switch_VT_7 269024775 0x1008FE07 XF86Switch_VT_8 269024776 0x1008FE08 XF86Switch_VT_9 269024777 0x1008FE09 XF86Switch_VT_10 269024778 0x1008FE0A XF86Switch_VT_11 269024779 0x1008FE0B XF86Switch_VT_12 269024780 0x1008FE0C XF86Ungrab 269024800 0x1008FE20 XF86ClearGrab 269024801 0x1008FE21 XF86Next_VMode 269024802 0x1008FE22 XF86Prev_VMode 269024803 0x1008FE23 XF86LogWindowTree 269024804 0x1008FE24 XF86LogGrabInfo 269024805 0x1008FE25 XF86ModeLock 269025025 0x1008FF01 | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 | SunAudioLowerVolume 268828535 0x1005FF77 SunAudioMute 268828536 0x1005FF78 SunAudioRaiseVolume 268828537 0x1005FF79 SunVideoDegauss 268828538 0x1005FF7A SunVideoLowerBrightness 268828539 0x1005FF7B SunVideoRaiseBrightness 268828540 0x1005FF7C SunPowerSwitchShift 268828541 0x1005FF7D XF86BrightnessAuto 268964084 0x100810F4 XF86DisplayOff 268964085 0x100810F5 XF86Info 268964198 0x10081166 XF86AspectRatio 268964215 0x10081177 XF86DVD 268964229 0x10081185 XF86Audio 268964232 0x10081188 XF86ChannelUp 268964242 0x10081192 XF86ChannelDown 268964243 0x10081193 XF86Break 268964251 0x1008119B XF86VideoPhone 268964256 0x100811A0 XF86ZoomReset 268964260 0x100811A4 XF86Editor 268964262 0x100811A6 XF86GraphicsEditor 268964264 0x100811A8 XF86Presentation 268964265 0x100811A9 XF86Database 268964266 0x100811AA XF86Voicemail 268964268 0x100811AC XF86Addressbook 268964269 0x100811AD XF86DisplayToggle 268964271 0x100811AF XF86SpellCheck 268964272 0x100811B0 XF86ContextMenu 268964278 0x100811B6 XF86MediaRepeat 268964279 0x100811B7 XF8610ChannelsUp 268964280 0x100811B8 XF8610ChannelsDown 268964281 0x100811B9 XF86Images 268964282 0x100811BA XF86NotificationCenter 268964284 0x100811BC XF86PickupPhone 268964285 0x100811BD XF86HangupPhone 268964286 0x100811BE XF86Fn 268964304 0x100811D0 XF86Fn_Esc 268964305 0x100811D1 XF86FnRightShift 268964325 0x100811E5 XF86Numeric0 268964352 0x10081200 XF86Numeric1 268964353 0x10081201 XF86Numeric2 268964354 0x10081202 XF86Numeric3 268964355 0x10081203 XF86Numeric4 268964356 0x10081204 XF86Numeric5 268964357 0x10081205 XF86Numeric6 268964358 0x10081206 XF86Numeric7 268964359 0x10081207 XF86Numeric8 268964360 0x10081208 XF86Numeric9 268964361 0x10081209 XF86NumericStar 268964362 0x1008120A XF86NumericPound 268964363 0x1008120B XF86NumericA 268964364 0x1008120C XF86NumericB 268964365 0x1008120D XF86NumericC 268964366 0x1008120E XF86NumericD 268964367 0x1008120F XF86CameraFocus 268964368 0x10081210 XF86WPSButton 268964369 0x10081211 XF86CameraZoomIn 268964373 0x10081215 XF86CameraZoomOut 268964374 0x10081216 XF86CameraUp 268964375 0x10081217 XF86CameraDown 268964376 0x10081218 XF86CameraLeft 268964377 0x10081219 XF86CameraRight 268964378 0x1008121A XF86AttendantOn 268964379 0x1008121B XF86AttendantOff 268964380 0x1008121C XF86AttendantToggle 268964381 0x1008121D XF86LightsToggle 268964382 0x1008121E XF86ALSToggle 268964400 0x10081230 XF86Buttonconfig 268964416 0x10081240 XF86Taskmanager 268964417 0x10081241 XF86Journal 268964418 0x10081242 XF86ControlPanel 268964419 0x10081243 XF86AppSelect 268964420 0x10081244 XF86Screensaver 268964421 0x10081245 XF86VoiceCommand 268964422 0x10081246 XF86Assistant 268964423 0x10081247 XF86EmojiPicker 268964425 0x10081249 XF86Dictate 268964426 0x1008124A XF86BrightnessMin 268964432 0x10081250 XF86BrightnessMax 268964433 0x10081251 XF86KbdInputAssistPrev 268964448 0x10081260 XF86KbdInputAssistNext 268964449 0x10081261 XF86KbdInputAssistPrevgroup 268964450 0x10081262 XF86KbdInputAssistNextgroup 268964451 0x10081263 XF86KbdInputAssistAccept 268964452 0x10081264 XF86KbdInputAssistCancel 268964453 0x10081265 XF86RightUp 268964454 0x10081266 XF86RightDown 268964455 0x10081267 XF86LeftUp 268964456 0x10081268 XF86LeftDown 268964457 0x10081269 XF86RootMenu 268964458 0x1008126A XF86MediaTopMenu 268964459 0x1008126B XF86Numeric11 268964460 0x1008126C XF86Numeric12 268964461 0x1008126D XF86AudioDesc 268964462 0x1008126E XF863DMode 268964463 0x1008126F XF86NextFavorite 268964464 0x10081270 XF86StopRecord 268964465 0x10081271 XF86PauseRecord 268964466 0x10081272 XF86VOD 268964467 0x10081273 XF86Unmute 268964468 0x10081274 XF86FastReverse 268964469 0x10081275 XF86SlowReverse 268964470 0x10081276 XF86Data 268964471 0x10081277 XF86OnScreenKeyboard 268964472 0x10081278 XF86PrivacyScreenToggle 268964473 0x10081279 XF86SelectiveScreenshot 268964474 0x1008127A XF86Macro1 268964496 0x10081290 XF86Macro2 268964497 0x10081291 XF86Macro3 268964498 0x10081292 XF86Macro4 268964499 0x10081293 XF86Macro5 268964500 0x10081294 XF86Macro6 268964501 0x10081295 XF86Macro7 268964502 0x10081296 XF86Macro8 268964503 0x10081297 XF86Macro9 268964504 0x10081298 XF86Macro10 268964505 0x10081299 XF86Macro11 268964506 0x1008129A XF86Macro12 268964507 0x1008129B XF86Macro13 268964508 0x1008129C XF86Macro14 268964509 0x1008129D XF86Macro15 268964510 0x1008129E XF86Macro16 268964511 0x1008129F XF86Macro17 268964512 0x100812A0 XF86Macro18 268964513 0x100812A1 XF86Macro19 268964514 0x100812A2 XF86Macro20 268964515 0x100812A3 XF86Macro21 268964516 0x100812A4 XF86Macro22 268964517 0x100812A5 XF86Macro23 268964518 0x100812A6 XF86Macro24 268964519 0x100812A7 XF86Macro25 268964520 0x100812A8 XF86Macro26 268964521 0x100812A9 XF86Macro27 268964522 0x100812AA XF86Macro28 268964523 0x100812AB XF86Macro29 268964524 0x100812AC XF86Macro30 268964525 0x100812AD XF86MacroRecordStart 268964528 0x100812B0 XF86MacroRecordStop 268964529 0x100812B1 XF86MacroPresetCycle 268964530 0x100812B2 XF86MacroPreset1 268964531 0x100812B3 XF86MacroPreset2 268964532 0x100812B4 XF86MacroPreset3 268964533 0x100812B5 XF86KbdLcdMenu1 268964536 0x100812B8 XF86KbdLcdMenu2 268964537 0x100812B9 XF86KbdLcdMenu3 268964538 0x100812BA XF86KbdLcdMenu4 268964539 0x100812BB XF86KbdLcdMenu5 268964540 0x100812BC XF86Switch_VT_1 269024769 0x1008FE01 XF86Switch_VT_2 269024770 0x1008FE02 XF86Switch_VT_3 269024771 0x1008FE03 XF86Switch_VT_4 269024772 0x1008FE04 XF86Switch_VT_5 269024773 0x1008FE05 XF86Switch_VT_6 269024774 0x1008FE06 XF86Switch_VT_7 269024775 0x1008FE07 XF86Switch_VT_8 269024776 0x1008FE08 XF86Switch_VT_9 269024777 0x1008FE09 XF86Switch_VT_10 269024778 0x1008FE0A XF86Switch_VT_11 269024779 0x1008FE0B XF86Switch_VT_12 269024780 0x1008FE0C .CE .CS XF86Ungrab 269024800 0x1008FE20 XF86ClearGrab 269024801 0x1008FE21 XF86Next_VMode 269024802 0x1008FE22 XF86Prev_VMode 269024803 0x1008FE23 XF86LogWindowTree 269024804 0x1008FE24 XF86LogGrabInfo 269024805 0x1008FE25 XF86ModeLock 269025025 0x1008FF01 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 | XF86TouchpadOff 269025201 0x1008FFB1 XF86AudioMicMute 269025202 0x1008FFB2 XF86Keyboard 269025203 0x1008FFB3 XF86WWAN 269025204 0x1008FFB4 XF86RFKill 269025205 0x1008FFB5 XF86AudioPreset 269025206 0x1008FFB6 XF86RotationLockToggle 269025207 0x1008FFB7 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), event(n) .SH KEYWORDS bind, binding, event, keysym '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: | > | 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 | XF86TouchpadOff 269025201 0x1008FFB1 XF86AudioMicMute 269025202 0x1008FFB2 XF86Keyboard 269025203 0x1008FFB3 XF86WWAN 269025204 0x1008FFB4 XF86RFKill 269025205 0x1008FFB5 XF86AudioPreset 269025206 0x1008FFB6 XF86RotationLockToggle 269025207 0x1008FFB7 XF86FullScreen 269025208 0x1008FFB8 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), event(n) .SH KEYWORDS bind, binding, event, keysym '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" End: |
Changes to doc/label.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for label widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/labelframe.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabelframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the labelframe's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabelframe\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the labelframe's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the labelframe widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for frame widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/listbox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
132 133 134 135 136 137 138 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for listbox widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate\fR \fIindex\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
379 380 381 382 383 384 385 | total width of the listbox text is off-screen to the left. \fIfraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | > > | < < < | 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 | total width of the listbox text is off-screen to the left. \fIfraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character) on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
429 430 431 432 433 434 435 | way through the listbox, and so on. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. | | | > < < | 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 | way through the listbox, and so on. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by \fInumber\fR lines; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then earlier elements become visible; if it is positive then later elements become visible. .RE .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for listboxes that give them Motif-like behavior. Much of the behavior of a listbox is determined by its \fB\-selectmode\fR option, which selects one of four ways of dealing with the selection. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Deleted doc/man.macros.
|
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < |
Changes to doc/menu.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | .nf \fBmenu\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fBtk_menuSetFocus\fR \fIpathName\fR .SO \-activebackground \-borderwidth \-foreground \-activeborderwidth \-cursor \-relief \-activeforeground \-disabledforeground \-takefocus | | | | | | | | | | | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 | .nf \fBmenu\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fBtk_menuSetFocus\fR \fIpathName\fR .SO \-activebackground \-borderwidth \-foreground \-activeborderwidth \-cursor \-relief \-activeforeground \-disabledforeground \-takefocus \-background \-font .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-postcommand postCommand Command If this option is specified then it provides a Tcl command to execute each time the menu is posted. The command is invoked by the \fBpost\fR widget command before posting the menu. Note that in Tk 8.0 on Macintosh and Windows, all post-commands in a system of menus are executed before any of those menus are posted. This is due to the limitations in the individual platforms' menu managers. .OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background For menu entries that are check buttons or radio buttons, this option specifies the color to display in the indicator when the check button or radio button is selected. .OP \-tearoff tearOff TearOff This option must have a proper boolean value, which specifies whether or not the menu should include a tear-off entry at the top. If so, it will exist as entry 0 of the menu and the other entries will number starting at 1. The default menu bindings arrange for the menu to be torn off when the tear-off entry is invoked. This option is ignored under Aqua/MacOS, where menus cannot be torn off. .OP \-tearoffcommand tearOffCommand TearOffCommand If this option has a non-empty value, then it specifies a Tcl command to invoke whenever the menu is torn off. The actual command will consist of the value of this option, followed by a space, followed by the name of the menu window, followed by a space, followed by the name of the name of the torn off menu window. For example, if the option's value is .QW "\fBa b\fR" and menu \fB.x.y\fR is torn off to create a new menu \fB.x.tearoff1\fR, then the command .QW "\fBa b .x.y .x.tearoff1\fR" will be invoked. This option is ignored under Aqua/MacOS, where menus cannot be torn off. .OP \-title title Title The string will be used to title the window created when this menu is torn off. If the title is NULL, then the window will have the title of the menubutton or the text of the cascade item from which this menu was invoked. .OP \-type type Type |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
299 300 301 302 303 304 305 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmenu\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmenu\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .PP Many of the widget commands for a menu take as one argument an indicator of which entry of the menu to operate on. These indicators are called \fIindex\fRes and may be specified in |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
335 336 337 338 339 340 341 | .QW "no entry at all" ; this is used most commonly with the \fBactivate\fR option to deactivate all the entries in the menu. In most cases the specification of \fBnone\fR causes nothing to happen in the widget command. This form may not be abbreviated. .TP 12 | | < | < | | > | 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 | .QW "no entry at all" ; this is used most commonly with the \fBactivate\fR option to deactivate all the entries in the menu. In most cases the specification of \fBnone\fR causes nothing to happen in the widget command. This form may not be abbreviated. .TP 12 \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR . Indicates the entry that covers the point in the menu's window specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates). If no entry covers that point, then this form is equivalent to \fBnone\fR. If only a single number is specified, it is treated as the y-coordinate. .TP 12 \fInumber\fR . Specifies the entry numerically, where 0 corresponds to the top-most entry of the menu, 1 to the entry below it, and so on. .TP 12 |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
519 520 521 522 523 524 525 | .SH "MENU ENTRY OPTIONS" The following options are allowed on menu entries. Most options are not supported by all entry types. .TP \fB\-activebackground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it | | | | > | | | 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 | .SH "MENU ENTRY OPTIONS" The following options are allowed on menu entries. Most options are not supported by all entry types. .TP \fB\-activebackground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it is active. This option is ignored on Aqua/MacOS. If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-activebackground\fR option for the overall menu is used. If the \fBtk_strictMotif\fR variable has been set to request strict Motif compliance, then this option is ignored and the \fB\-background\fR option is used in its place. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP \fB\-activeforeground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it is active. This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-activeforeground\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP \fB\-accelerator \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a string to display at the right side of the menu entry. Normally describes an accelerator keystroke sequence that may be used to invoke the same function as the menu entry. This is a display option, it does not actually set the corresponding binding (which can be achieved using the \fBbind\fR command). This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP \fB\-background \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled). This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-background\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP \fB\-bitmap \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a bitmap to display in the menu instead of a textual label, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. This option overrides the \fB\-label\fR option (as controlled by the \fB\-compound\fR option) but may be reset to an empty string to enable a textual label to be displayed. If a \fB\-image\fR option has been specified, it overrides \fB\-bitmap\fR. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP \fB\-columnbreak \fIvalue\fR . When this option is zero, the entry appears below the previous entry. When this option is one, the entry appears at the top of a new column in the menu. This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS, where menus are always a single column. .TP \fB\-command \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a Tcl command to execute when the menu entry is invoked. Not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
599 600 601 602 603 604 605 | the \fB\-font\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP \fB\-foreground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled). | > | | 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 | the \fB\-font\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP \fB\-foreground \fIvalue\fR . Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled). This option is ignored on Aqua/macOS. If it is specified as an empty string (the default), then the \fB\-foreground\fR option for the overall menu is used. This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries. .TP \fB\-hidemargin \fIvalue\fR . Specifies whether the standard margins should be drawn for this menu entry. This is useful when creating palette with images in them, i.e., |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/menubar.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_menuBar, tk_bindForTraversal \- Obsolete support for menu bars .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_menuBar \fIframe \fR?\fImenu menu ...\fR? .sp | | | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_menuBar, tk_bindForTraversal \- Obsolete support for menu bars .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_menuBar \fIframe \fR?\fImenu menu ...\fR? .sp \fBtk_bindForTraversal \fIarg arg ... \fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures were used in Tk 3.6 and earlier releases to help manage pulldown menus and to implement keyboard traversal of menus. In Tk 4.0 and later releases they are no longer needed. Stubs for these procedures have been retained for |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/menubutton.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | \-background \-highlightbackground \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightcolor \-text \-borderwidth \-highlightthickness \-textvariable \-cursor \-image \-underline \-compound \-justify \-wraplength .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" | | | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 | \-background \-highlightbackground \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightcolor \-text \-borderwidth \-highlightthickness \-textvariable \-cursor \-image \-underline \-compound \-justify \-wraplength .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-direction direction Direction Specifies where the menu is going to be popup up. \fBabove\fR tries to pop the menu above the menubutton. \fBbelow\fR tries to pop the menu below the menubutton. \fBleft\fR tries to pop the menu to the left of the menubutton. \fBright\fR tries to pop the menu to the right of the menu button. \fBflush\fR pops the menu directly over the menubutton. In the case of \fBabove\fR or \fBbelow\fR, the direction will be reversed if the menu would show offscreen. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
113 114 115 116 117 118 119 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmenubutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmenubutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for menubutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/message.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
102 103 104 105 106 107 108 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmessage\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmessage\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for message widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/messageBox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
62 63 64 65 66 67 68 | \fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR . Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message box is displayed on top of its parent window. .TP \fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR . | | < | | 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 | \fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR . Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message box is displayed on top of its parent window. .TP \fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR . Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box. The default value is an empty string. .TP \fB\-type\fR \fIpredefinedType\fR . Arranges for a predefined set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible for \fIpredefinedType\fR: .RS .TP 18 |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/options.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
54 55 56 57 58 59 60 | definition of active elements. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons). .OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements. See above for definition of active elements. | < < < | 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 | definition of active elements. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons). .OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements. See above for definition of active elements. .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap) is to be displayed in the widget. Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
220 221 222 223 224 225 226 | this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by the height of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra internal space above and/or below what it displays inside. Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding options. | < < < < < < < | 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 | this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by the height of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra internal space above and/or below what it displays inside. Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding options. .OP \-relief relief Relief Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are \fBraised\fR, \fBsunken\fR, \fBflat\fR, \fBridge\fR, \fBsolid\fR, and \fBgroove\fR. The value indicates how the interior of the widget should appear relative to its exterior; for example, \fBraised\fR means the interior of |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/pack.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | than receiving default values. .RE .TP \fBpack forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from the packing order for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the packer. | < < < < < < < < | 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 | than receiving default values. .RE .TP \fBpack forget \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? Removes each of the \fIwindow\fRs from the packing order for its container and unmaps their windows. The content will no longer be managed by the packer. .TP \fBpack info \fIwindow\fR Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the window given by \fIwindow\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBpack configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are .QW "\fB\-in \fIcontainer\fR" |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
154 155 156 157 158 159 160 | disabled for \fIcontainer\fR. In either of these cases an empty string is returned. If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIcontainer\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP | | > | | > | 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 | disabled for \fIcontainer\fR. In either of these cases an empty string is returned. If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fIcontainer\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBpack slaves \fIwindow\fR Returns a list of all of the content windows in the packing order for \fIwindow\fR. The order of the content windows in the list is the same as their order in the packing order. If \fIwindow\fR has no content then an empty string is returned. .VS "TIP 581" .TP \fBpack content \fIwindow\fR . Synonym for \fBpack slaves \fIwindow\fR. .VE "TIP 581" .SH "THE PACKER ALGORITHM" .PP For each container the packer maintains an ordered list of content windows called the \fIpacking list\fR. The \fB\-in\fR, \fB\-after\fR, and \fB\-before\fR configuration options are used to specify the container for each content and the content's position in the packing list. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/panedwindow.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBpanedwindow\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the panedwindow's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBpanedwindow\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the panedwindow's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the panedwindow widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for panedwindow widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBadd \fIwindow \fR?\fIwindow ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/photo.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | \fBimage create photo \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIimageName \fBblank\fR \fIimageName \fBcget \fIoption\fR \fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBcopy \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? | | | | | | | | | > | | < | | | | < < < < | > | | | | | | < < < | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 | \fBimage create photo \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIimageName \fBblank\fR \fIimageName \fBcget \fIoption\fR \fIimageName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBcopy \fIsourceImage\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBget \fIx y\fR \fIimageName \fBput \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBread \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBredither\fR \fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? \fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A photo is an image whose pixels can display any color or be transparent. A photo image is stored internally in full color (32 bits per pixel), and is displayed using dithering if necessary. Image data for a photo image can be obtained from a file or a string, or it can be supplied from C code through a procedural interface. At present, only .VS 8.6 PNG, .VE 8.6 GIF and PPM/PGM formats are supported, but an interface exists to allow additional image file formats to be added easily. A photo image is transparent in regions where no image data has been supplied or where it has been set transparent by the \fBtransparency set\fR subcommand. .SH "CREATING PHOTOS" .PP Like all images, photos are created using the \fBimage create\fR command. Photos support the following \fIoptions\fR: .TP \fB\-data \fIstring\fR . Specifies the contents of the image as a string. The string should contain binary data or, for some formats, base64-encoded data (this is currently guaranteed to be supported for PNG and GIF images). The format of the string must be one of those for which there is an image file format handler that will accept string data. If both the \fB\-data\fR and \fB\-file\fR options are specified, the \fB\-file\fR option takes precedence. .TP \fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR . Specifies the name of the file format for the data specified with the \fB\-data\fR or \fB\-file\fR option. .TP \fB\-file \fIname\fR . \fIname\fR gives the name of a file that is to be read to supply data for the photo image. The file format must be one of those for which there is an image file format handler that can read data. .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
124 125 126 127 128 129 130 | .PP When a photo image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 | .PP When a photo image is created, Tk also creates a new command whose name is the same as the image. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the image. It has the following general form: .CS \fIimageName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .PP Those options that write data to the image generally expand the size of the image, if necessary, to accommodate the data written to the image, unless the user has specified non-zero values for the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
235 236 237 238 239 240 241 | is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and the source image is used as-is. The default compositing rule is \fIoverlay\fR. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . | | < < < < < < | | | | | | | < | | | | < < < < > < | | < < < < < | > | | > > > | | | < < < < < < | | | < < < < | 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 | is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and the source image is used as-is. The default compositing rule is \fIoverlay\fR. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Returns image data in the form of a string. The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-background\fI color\fR . If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by the specified color. .TP \fB\-format\fI format-name\fR . Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used. Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write a string containing this image data. If this option is not given, this subcommand uses a format that consists of a list (one element per row) of lists (one element per pixel/column) of colors in .QW \fB#\fIrrggbb\fR format (where \fIrr\fR is a pair of hexadecimal digits for the red channel, \fIgg\fR for green, and \fIbb\fR for blue). .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be returned. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of \fIimageName\fR. If all four coordinates are given, they specify diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region, including x1,y1 and excluding x2,y2. The default, if this option is not given, is the whole image. .TP \fB\-grayscale\fR . If this options is specified, the data will not contain color information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBget\fR \fIx y\fR . Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) in the image as a list of three integers between 0 and 255, representing the red, green and blue components respectively. .TP \fIimageName \fBput\fR \fIdata\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Sets pixels in \fI imageName\fR to the data specified in \fIdata\fR. This command first searches the list of image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data in \fIdata\fR, and then reads the image encoded within into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image). If \fIdata\fR does not match any known format, an attempt to interpret it as a (top-to-bottom) list of scan-lines is made, with each scan-line being a (left-to-right) list of pixel colors (see \fBTk_GetColor\fR for a description of valid colors.) Every scan-line must be of the same length. Note that when \fIdata\fR is a single color name, you are instructing Tk to fill a rectangular region with that color. The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR . Specifies the format of the image data in \fIdata\fR. Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with \fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data format handler to read the data. .TP \fB\-to \fIx1 y1\fR ?\fIx2 y2\fR? . Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR) of the region of \fIimageName\fR into which the image data will be copied. The default position is (0,0). If \fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR is given and \fIdata\fR is not large enough to cover the rectangle specified by this option, the image data extracted will be tiled so it covers the entire destination rectangle. Note that if \fIdata\fR specifies a single color value, then a region extending to the bottom-right corner represented by (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) will be filled with that color. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBread\fR \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Reads image data from the file named \fIfilename\fR into the image. This command first searches the list of image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data in \fIfilename\fR, and then reads the image in \fIfilename\fR into \fIimageName\fR (the destination image). The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-format \fIformat-name\fR . Specifies the format of the image data in \fIfilename\fR. Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with \fIformat-name\fR will be used while searching for an image data format handler to read the data. .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the image file data to be copied to the destination image. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from (\fIx1,y1\fR) to the bottom-right corner of the image in the image file. If all four coordinates are |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
390 391 392 393 394 395 396 | quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors. If the image data for \fIimageName\fR is supplied in pieces, the dithered image may not be exactly correct. Normally the difference is not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this command can be used to recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is displayed. .TP | | < | | < < < | < | | < < | < < < | < | | | | | | < < < | 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 | quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors. If the image data for \fIimageName\fR is supplied in pieces, the dithered image may not be exactly correct. Normally the difference is not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this command can be used to recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is displayed. .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in the photo image. Several subcommands are available: .RS .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency get \fIx y\fR . Returns a boolean indicating if the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) is transparent. .TP \fIimageName \fBtransparency set \fIx y boolean\fR . Makes the pixel at (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR) transparent if \fIboolean\fR is true, and makes that pixel opaque otherwise. .RE .TP \fIimageName \fBwrite \fIfilename\fR ?\fIoption value(s) ...\fR? . Writes image data from \fIimageName\fR to a file named \fIfilename\fR. The following options may be specified: .RS .TP \fB\-background\fI color\fR . If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by the specified color. .TP \fB\-format\fI format-name\fR . Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used to write the data to the file. Specifically, this subcommand searches for the first handler whose name matches an initial substring of \fIformat-name\fR and which has the capability to write an image file. If this option is not given, the format is guessed from the file extension. If that cannot be determined, this subcommand uses the first handler that has the capability to write an image file. .TP \fB\-from \fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR . Specifies a rectangular region of \fIimageName\fR to be written to the image file. If only \fIx1\fR and \fIy1\fR are specified, the region extends from \fI(x1,y1)\fR to the bottom-right corner of \fIimageName\fR. If all four coordinates are given, they specify |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
464 465 466 467 468 469 470 | .SH "IMAGE FORMATS" .PP The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional image file formats to be added easily. The photo image code maintains a list of these handlers. Handlers are added to the list by registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR. The standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF | < < < < < | | | > | | | | | | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < | | | | < | | | | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 | .SH "IMAGE FORMATS" .PP The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional image file formats to be added easily. The photo image code maintains a list of these handlers. Handlers are added to the list by registering them with a call to \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR. The standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for PPM/PGM, PNG and GIF formats, which are automatically registered on initialization. .PP When reading an image file or processing string data specified with the \fB\-data\fR configuration option, the photo image code invokes each handler in turn until one is found that claims to be able to read the data in the file or string. Usually this will find the correct handler, but if it does not, the user may give a format name with the \fB\-format\fR option to specify which handler to use. In fact the photo image code will try those handlers whose names begin with the string specified for the \fB\-format\fR option (the comparison is case-insensitive). For example, if the user specifies \fB\-format gif\fR, then a handler named GIF87 or GIF89 may be invoked, but a handler named JPEG may not (assuming that such handlers had been registered). .PP When writing image data to a file, the processing of the \fB\-format\fR option is slightly different: the string value given for the \fB\-format\fR option must begin with the complete name of the requested handler, and may contain additional information following that, which the handler can use, for example, to specify which variant to use of the formats supported by the handler. Note that not all image handlers may support writing transparency data to a file, even where the target image format does. .SS "FORMAT SUBOPTIONS" .PP .VS 8.6 Some image formats support sub-options, which are specified at the time that the image is loaded using additional words in the \fB\-format\fR option. At the time of writing, the following are supported: .TP \fBgif \-index\fI indexValue\fR . When parsing a multi-part GIF image, Tk normally only accesses the first image. By giving the \fB\-index\fR sub-option, the \fIindexValue\fR'th value may be used instead. The \fIindexValue\fR must be an integer from 0 up to the number of image parts in the GIF data. .TP \fBpng \-alpha\fI alphaValue\fR . An additional alpha filtering for the overall image, which allows the background on which the image is displayed to show through. This usually also has the effect of desaturating the image. The \fIalphaValue\fR must be between 0.0 and 1.0. .VE 8.6 .SH "COLOR ALLOCATION" .PP When a photo image is displayed in a window, the photo image code allocates colors to use to display the image and dithers the image, if necessary, to display a reasonable approximation to the image using the colors that are available. The colors are allocated as a color cube, that is, the number of colors allocated is the product of the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
712 713 714 715 716 717 718 |
.CS
\fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png"
\fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e
\-format "png \-alpha 0.5"
button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled
.CE
.VE 8.6
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 |
.CS
\fBimage create photo\fR icon \-file "icon.png"
\fBimage create photo\fR iconDisabled \-file "icon.png" \e
\-format "png \-alpha 0.5"
button .b \-image icon \-disabledimage iconDisabled
.CE
.VE 8.6
.SH "SEE ALSO"
image(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
photo, image, color
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/place.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
187 188 189 190 191 192 193 | .TP \fBplace info \fIwindow\fR Returns a list giving the current configuration of \fIwindow\fR. The list consists of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs in exactly the same form as might be specified to the \fBplace configure\fR command. .TP | | > | | > | 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 | .TP \fBplace info \fIwindow\fR Returns a list giving the current configuration of \fIwindow\fR. The list consists of \fIoption\-value\fR pairs in exactly the same form as might be specified to the \fBplace configure\fR command. .TP \fBplace slaves \fIwindow\fR Returns a list of all the content windows for which \fIwindow\fR is the container. If there is no content for \fIwindow\fR then an empty string is returned. .VS "TIP 581" .TP \fBplace content \fIwindow\fR . Synonym for \fBplace slaves \fIwindow\fR. .VE "TIP 581" .PP If the configuration of a window has been retrieved with \fBplace info\fR, that configuration can be restored later by first using \fBplace forget\fR to erase any existing information for the window and then invoking \fBplace configure\fR with the saved information. .SH "FINE POINTS" |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/popup.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 | $m add command \-label "Example 1" \-command bell $m add command \-label "Example 2" \-command bell # Create something to attach it to pack [label .l \-text "Click me!"] # Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked | | | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 |
$m add command \-label "Example 1" \-command bell
$m add command \-label "Example 2" \-command bell
# Create something to attach it to
pack [label .l \-text "Click me!"]
# Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked
bind .l <1> {\fBtk_popup\fR .popupMenu %X %Y}
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
bind(n), menu(n), tk_optionMenu(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
menu, popup
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/radiobutton.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
172 173 174 175 176 177 178 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBradiobutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBradiobutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for radiobutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/scale.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
134 135 136 137 138 139 140 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBscale\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBscale\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for scale widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/scrollbar.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
99 100 101 102 103 104 105 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBscrollbar\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 | .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBscrollbar\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for scrollbar widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate \fR?\fIelement\fR? . |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 | The widget should adjust its view so that the point given by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget. If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333 refers to a point one-third of the way through the document, and so on. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR . The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages. It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there is a slight overlap between the old and new views. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should | > > > > > > > > > | < < < < < < < < < < < < | 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 | The widget should adjust its view so that the point given by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget. If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333 refers to a point one-third of the way through the document, and so on. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR . The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units. The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget, such as characters or lines in a text widget. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit should scroll off the bottom or right of the window. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR . The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages. It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there is a slight overlap between the old and new views. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should become visible. .SH "OLD COMMAND SYNTAX" .PP In versions of Tk before 4.0, the \fBset\fR and \fBget\fR widget commands used a different form. This form is still supported for backward compatibility, but it is deprecated. In the old command syntax, the \fBset\fR widget command has the |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/selection.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH selection n 8.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME selection \- Manipulate the X selection .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH selection n 8.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME selection \- Manipulate the X selection .SH SYNOPSIS \fBselection \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command provides a Tcl interface to the X selection mechanism and implements the full selection functionality described in the X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM). .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/send.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH send n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME send \- Execute a command in a different application .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH send n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME send \- Execute a command in a different application .SH SYNOPSIS \fBsend ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIapp cmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command arranges for \fIcmd\fR (and \fIarg\fRs) to be executed in the application named by \fIapp\fR. It returns the result or error from that command execution. \fIApp\fR may be the name of any application whose main window is |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/spinbox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 | \-borderwidth \-insertborderwidth \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertontime \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertwidth \-takefocus \-font \-insertofftime \-textvariable \-foreground \-justify \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-relief \-highlightcolor \-repeatdelay | < | 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | \-borderwidth \-insertborderwidth \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertontime \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertwidth \-takefocus \-font \-insertofftime \-textvariable \-foreground \-justify \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-relief \-highlightcolor \-repeatdelay .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-buttonbackground buttonBackground Background The background color to be used for the spin buttons. .OP \-buttoncursor buttonCursor Cursor The cursor to be used when over the spin buttons. If this is empty (the default), a default cursor will be used. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 | when using the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range. This must be a format specifier of the form \fB%<pad>.<pad>f\fR, as it will format a floating-point number. .OP \-from from From A floating-point value corresponding to the lowest value for a spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-to\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its | | < | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 | when using the \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-to\fR range. This must be a format specifier of the form \fB%<pad>.<pad>f\fR, as it will format a floating-point number. .OP \-from from From A floating-point value corresponding to the lowest value for a spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-to\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its contents. This value must be less than the \fB\-to\fR option. If \fB\-values\fR is specified, it supersedes this option. .OP "\-invalidcommand or \-invcmd" invalidCommand InvalidCommand Specifies a script to eval when \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns 0. Setting it to an empty string disables this feature (the default). The best use of this option is to set it to \fIbell\fR. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more information. .OP \-increment increment Increment |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the spinbox may be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options. .OP \-to to To A floating-point value corresponding to the highest value for the spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control | | < | 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 | displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the spinbox may be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options. .OP \-to to To A floating-point value corresponding to the highest value for the spinbox, to be used in conjunction with \fB\-from\fR and \fB\-increment\fR. When all are specified correctly, the spinbox will use these values to control its contents. This value must be greater than the \fB\-from\fR option. If \fB\-values\fR is specified, it supersedes this option. .OP \-validate validate Validate Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: \fBnone\fR, \fBfocus\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, \fBkey\fR, or \fBall\fR. It defaults to \fBnone\fR. When you want validation, you must explicitly state which mode you wish to use. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more. .OP "\-validatecommand or \-vcmd" validateCommand ValidateCommand |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
235 236 237 238 239 240 241 | then the \fB-validate\fR option will be automatically set to \fBnone\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 | then the \fB-validate\fR option will be automatically set to \fBnone\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBspinbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .SS INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for spinboxes take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the spinbox's |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
466 467 468 469 470 471 472 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | > > | | < < | 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for spinboxes that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/text.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 | .IP [3] If the selection is claimed away by another application or by another window within this application, then the \fBsel\fR tag will be removed from all characters in the text. .IP [4] Whenever the \fBsel\fR tag range changes a virtual event \fB<<Selection>>\fR is generated. .PP The \fBsel\fR tag is automatically defined when a text widget is created, and it may not be deleted with the .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag delete\fR" widget command. Furthermore, the \fB\-selectbackground\fR, \fB\-selectborderwidth\fR, and \fB\-selectforeground\fR options for the text widget are tied to the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-borderwidth\fR, and | > > > | 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 | .IP [3] If the selection is claimed away by another application or by another window within this application, then the \fBsel\fR tag will be removed from all characters in the text. .IP [4] Whenever the \fBsel\fR tag range changes a virtual event \fB<<Selection>>\fR is generated. It might also be generated when selection is affected but not actually changed. Further, multiple selection changes could happen before events can be processed leading to multiple events with the same visible selection. .PP The \fBsel\fR tag is automatically defined when a text widget is created, and it may not be deleted with the .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag delete\fR" widget command. Furthermore, the \fB\-selectbackground\fR, \fB\-selectborderwidth\fR, and \fB\-selectforeground\fR options for the text widget are tied to the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-borderwidth\fR, and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 | .CE .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBtext\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the text's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS | | | 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 | .CE .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBtext\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the text's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the text widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for text widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 | . Include information about embedded windows in the dump results. The value of a window is its Tk pathname, unless the window has not been created yet. (It must have a create script.) In this case an empty string is returned, and you must query the window by its index position to get more information. .RE .TP | | | 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 | . Include information about embedded windows in the dump results. The value of a window is its Tk pathname, unless the window has not been created yet. (It must have a create script.) In this case an empty string is returned, and you must query the window by its index position to get more information. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBedit \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command controls the undo mechanism and the modified flag. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBedit\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 | The insert, delete, edit undo and edit redo commands or the user can set or clear the modified flag. If \fIboolean\fR is specified, sets the modified flag of the widget to \fIboolean\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit redo\fR . When the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, reapplies the last undone edits provided | | < | | < | | | 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 | The insert, delete, edit undo and edit redo commands or the user can set or clear the modified flag. If \fIboolean\fR is specified, sets the modified flag of the widget to \fIboolean\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit redo\fR . When the \fB\-undo\fR option is true, reapplies the last undone edits provided no other edits were done since then. Generates an error when the redo stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit reset\fR . Clears the undo and redo stacks. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit separator\fR . Inserts a separator (boundary) on the undo stack. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false. .TP \fIpathName \fBedit undo\fR . Undoes the last edit action when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. An edit action is defined as all the insert and delete commands that are recorded on the undo stack in between two separators. Generates an error when the undo stack is empty. Does nothing when the \fB\-undo\fR option is false. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR ?\fB\-displaychars\fR? ?\fB\-\-\fR? \fIindex1\fR ?\fIindex2 ...\fR? . Return a range of characters from the text. The return value will be all the characters in the text starting with the one whose index is \fIindex1\fR and |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 | ranges of text will be returned in a list. Invalid ranges will not be represented with empty strings in the list. The ranges are returned in the order passed to \fIpathName \fBget\fR. If the \fB\-displaychars\fR option is given, then, within each range, only those characters which are not elided will be returned. This may have the effect that some of the returned ranges are empty strings. .TP | | | | 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 | ranges of text will be returned in a list. Invalid ranges will not be represented with empty strings in the list. The ranges are returned in the order passed to \fIpathName \fBget\fR. If the \fB\-displaychars\fR option is given, then, within each range, only those characters which are not elided will be returned. This may have the effect that some of the returned ranges are empty strings. .TP \fIpathName \fBimage \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate embedded images. The behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBimage\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBimage cget \fIindex option\fR . Returns the value of a configuration option for an embedded image. \fIIndex\fR identifies the embedded image, and \fIoption\fR specifies a particular |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 | characters will receive all of the tags in this list and no others, regardless of the tags present around the insertion point. If multiple \fIchars\fR\-\fItagList\fR argument pairs are present, they produce the same effect as if a separate \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR widget command had been issued for each pair, in order. The last \fItagList\fR argument may be omitted. .TP | | | 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 | characters will receive all of the tags in this list and no others, regardless of the tags present around the insertion point. If multiple \fIchars\fR\-\fItagList\fR argument pairs are present, they produce the same effect as if a separate \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR widget command had been issued for each pair, in order. The last \fItagList\fR argument may be omitted. .TP \fIpathName \fBmark \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate marks. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBmark\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBmark gravity \fImarkName\fR ?\fIdirection\fR? |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 | \fIpathName \fBsync -command \fIcommand\fR Schedules \fIcommand\fR to be executed (by the event loop) exactly once as soon as all line heights are up-to-date. If there are no pending line metrics calculations, the scheduling is immediate. The command returns the empty string. \fBbgerror\fR is called on \fIcommand\fR failure. .RE .TP | | | 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 | \fIpathName \fBsync -command \fIcommand\fR Schedules \fIcommand\fR to be executed (by the event loop) exactly once as soon as all line heights are up-to-date. If there are no pending line metrics calculations, the scheduling is immediate. The command returns the empty string. \fBbgerror\fR is called on \fIcommand\fR failure. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBtag \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate tags. The exact behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBtag\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBtag add \fItagName index1 \fR?\fIindex2 index1 index2 ...\fR? |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 | the command returns the \fIscript\fR associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (an error occurs if there is no such binding). If both \fIscript\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the | | | > | | > | | 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 | the command returns the \fIscript\fR associated with \fItagName\fR and \fIsequence\fR (an error occurs if there is no such binding). If both \fIscript\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagName\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR) or virtual events. Mouse and keyboard event bindings for a text widget respectively use the \fBcurrent\fR and \fBinsert\fR marks described under \fBMARKS\fR above. An \fBEnter\fR event triggers for a tag when the tag first becomes present on the current character, and a \fBLeave\fR event triggers for a tag when it ceases to be present on the current character. \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events can happen either because the \fBcurrent\fR mark moved or because the character at that position changed. Note that these events are different than \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events for windows. Mouse events are directed to the current character, while keyboard events are directed to the insert character. If a virtual event is used in a binding, that binding can trigger only if the virtual event is defined by an underlying mouse-related or keyboard-related event. .PP It is possible for the current character to have multiple tags, and for each of them to have a binding for a particular event sequence. When this occurs, one binding is invoked for each tag, in order from lowest-priority to highest priority. If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag, then the |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 | \fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string. .RE .TP | | | 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 | \fIindex1\fR\-\fIindex2\fR pairs. If the last \fIindex2\fR is omitted then the tag is removed from the single character at \fIindex1\fR. If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. \fIindex1\fR is past the end of the file or \fIindex2\fR is less than or equal to \fIindex1\fR) then the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBwindow \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? . This command is used to manipulate embedded windows. The behavior of the command depends on the \fIoption\fR argument that follows the \fBwindow\fR argument. The following forms of the command are currently supported: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBwindow cget \fIindex option\fR |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 | Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the horizontal span of the text is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to | | | | | | < < | > > | 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 | Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the horizontal span of the text is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBunits\fR, \fBpages\fR or \fBpixels\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then \fInumber\fR must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as .QW 2.0c or .QW 1i (the result is rounded to the nearest integer value. If no units are given, pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR pixels. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fR?\fIargs\fR? . This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 | the widget will never scroll beyond the last pixel, and so a value of 1 will effectively be rounded back to whatever fraction ensures the last pixel is at the bottom of the window, and some other pixel is at the top. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjust the view in the window up or down according to | | | | | | 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 | the widget will never scroll beyond the last pixel, and so a value of 1 will effectively be rounded back to whatever fraction ensures the last pixel is at the bottom of the window, and some other pixel is at the top. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR . This command adjust the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fIWhat\fR must be \fBunits\fR, \fBpages\fR or \fBpixels\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR then \fInumber\fR must be an integer, otherwise number may be specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as .QW 2.0c or .QW 1i (the result is rounded to the nearest integer value. If no units are given, pixels are assumed). If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by \fInumber\fR lines on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls; if it is \fBpixels\fR then the view |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 | Tk automatically creates class bindings for texts that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word is dependent on the value of the \fBtcl_wordchars\fR variable. See \fBtclvars\fR(n). .IP [1] | | | 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 | Tk automatically creates class bindings for texts that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word is dependent on the value of the \fBtcl_wordchars\fR variable. See \fBtclvars\fR(n). .IP [1] Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor at the closest edge of the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget. Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes out a selection between the insertion cursor and the character under the mouse. .IP [2] Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse and positions the insertion cursor at the start of the word. Dragging after a |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 | .IP [28] Control-o opens a new line by inserting a newline character in front of the insertion cursor without moving the insertion cursor. .IP [29] Meta-backspace and Meta-Delete delete the word to the left of the insertion cursor. .IP [30] | < < < > > > | 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 | .IP [28] Control-o opens a new line by inserting a newline character in front of the insertion cursor without moving the insertion cursor. .IP [29] Meta-backspace and Meta-Delete delete the word to the left of the insertion cursor. .IP [30] Control-x deletes whatever is selected in the text widget after copying it to the clipboard. .IP [31] Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of the insertion cursor. .IP [32] Control-z undoes the last edit action if the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. Does nothing otherwise. .IP [33] Control-Z (or Control-y on Windows) reapplies the last undone edit action if the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. Does nothing otherwise. .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/tk.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH tk n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH tk n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtk\fR command provides access to miscellaneous elements of Tk's internal state. Most of the information manipulated by this command pertains to the application as a whole, or to a screen or display, rather than to a |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/tk4.0.ps.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 | % FrameMaker. % NOTE % This file fixes the problem with NeWS printers dithering color output. % Any questions should be sent to [email protected] % % Known Problems: % Due to bugs in Transcript, the 'PS-Adobe-' is omitted from line 1 | | | 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 | % FrameMaker. % NOTE % This file fixes the problem with NeWS printers dithering color output. % Any questions should be sent to [email protected] % % Known Problems: % Due to bugs in Transcript, the 'PS-Adobe-' is omitted from line 1 /FMversion (3.0) def % Set up Color vs. Black-and-White /FMPrintInColor { % once-thru loop gimmick % See if we're a NeWSprint printer /currentcanvas where { pop systemdict /separationdict known exit |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 |
% } if
systemdict /colorimage known
systemdict /currentcolortransfer known and
exit } loop def
% Uncomment the following line to force b&w on color printer
% /FMPrintInColor false def
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 |
% } if
systemdict /colorimage known
systemdict /currentcolortransfer known and
exit } loop def
% Uncomment the following line to force b&w on color printer
% /FMPrintInColor false def
/FrameDict 195 dict def
systemdict /errordict known not {/errordict 10 dict def
errordict /rangecheck {stop} put} if
% The readline in 23.0 doesn't recognize cr's as nl's on AppleTalk
FrameDict /tmprangecheck errordict /rangecheck get put
errordict /rangecheck {FrameDict /bug true put} put
FrameDict /bug false put
mark
% Some PS machines read past the CR, so keep the following 3 lines together!
currentfile 5 string readline
00
0000000000
cleartomark
errordict /rangecheck FrameDict /tmprangecheck get put
FrameDict /bug get {
/readline {
/gstring exch def
/gfile exch def
/gindex 0 def
{
gfile read pop
dup 10 eq {exit} if
dup 13 eq {exit} if
gstring exch gindex exch put
/gindex gindex 1 add def
} loop
pop
gstring 0 gindex getinterval true
} def
} if
/FMVERSION {
FMversion ne {
/Times-Roman findfont 18 scalefont setfont
100 100 moveto
(FrameMaker version does not match postscript_prolog!)
dup =
show showpage
} if
} def
/FMLOCAL {
FrameDict begin
0 def
end
} def
/gstring FMLOCAL
/gfile FMLOCAL
/gindex FMLOCAL
/orgxfer FMLOCAL
/orgproc FMLOCAL
/organgle FMLOCAL
/orgfreq FMLOCAL
/yscale FMLOCAL
/xscale FMLOCAL
/manualfeed FMLOCAL
/paperheight FMLOCAL
/paperwidth FMLOCAL
/FMDOCUMENT {
array /FMfonts exch def
/#copies exch def
FrameDict begin
0 ne dup {setmanualfeed} if
/manualfeed exch def
/paperheight exch def
/paperwidth exch def
/yscale exch def
/xscale exch def
currenttransfer cvlit /orgxfer exch def
currentscreen cvlit /orgproc exch def
/organgle exch def /orgfreq exch def
setpapername
manualfeed {true} {papersize} ifelse
{manualpapersize} {false} ifelse
{desperatepapersize} if
end
} def
/pagesave FMLOCAL
/orgmatrix FMLOCAL
/landscape FMLOCAL
/FMBEGINPAGE {
FrameDict begin
/pagesave save def
3.86 setmiterlimit
/landscape exch 0 ne def
landscape {
90 rotate 0 exch neg translate pop
}
{pop pop}
ifelse
xscale yscale scale
/orgmatrix matrix def
gsave
} def
/FMENDPAGE {
grestore
pagesave restore
end
showpage
} def
/FMFONTDEFINE {
FrameDict begin
findfont
ReEncode
1 index exch
definefont
FMfonts 3 1 roll
put
end
} def
/FMFILLS {
FrameDict begin
array /fillvals exch def
end
} def
/FMFILL {
FrameDict begin
fillvals 3 1 roll put
end
} def
/FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS {
newpath
0.0 0.0 moveto
1 setlinewidth
0 setlinecap
0 0 0 sethsbcolor
0 setgray
} bind def
/fx FMLOCAL
/fy FMLOCAL
/fh FMLOCAL
/fw FMLOCAL
/llx FMLOCAL
/lly FMLOCAL
/urx FMLOCAL
/ury FMLOCAL
/FMBEGINEPSF {
end
/FMEPSF save def
/showpage {} def
FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS
[/fy /fx /fh /fw /ury /urx /lly /llx] {exch def} forall
fx fy translate
rotate
fw urx llx sub div fh ury lly sub div scale
llx neg lly neg translate
} bind def
/FMENDEPSF {
FMEPSF restore
FrameDict begin
} bind def
FrameDict begin
/setmanualfeed {
%%BeginFeature *ManualFeed True
statusdict /manualfeed true put
%%EndFeature
} def
/max {2 copy lt {exch} if pop} bind def
/min {2 copy gt {exch} if pop} bind def
/inch {72 mul} def
/pagedimen {
paperheight sub abs 16 lt exch
paperwidth sub abs 16 lt and
{/papername exch def} {pop} ifelse
} def
/papersizedict FMLOCAL
/setpapername {
/papersizedict 14 dict def
papersizedict begin
/papername /unknown def
/Letter 8.5 inch 11.0 inch pagedimen
/LetterSmall 7.68 inch 10.16 inch pagedimen
/Tabloid 11.0 inch 17.0 inch pagedimen
/Ledger 17.0 inch 11.0 inch pagedimen
/Legal 8.5 inch 14.0 inch pagedimen
/Statement 5.5 inch 8.5 inch pagedimen
/Executive 7.5 inch 10.0 inch pagedimen
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
233 234 235 236 237 238 239 |
/A4 {a4tray a4} def
/A4Small {a4tray a4small} def
/B4 {b4tray b4} def
/B5 {b5tray b5} def
/unknown {unknown} def
papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get
end
| | | | | | | | 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 |
/A4 {a4tray a4} def
/A4Small {a4tray a4small} def
/B4 {b4tray b4} def
/B5 {b5tray b5} def
/unknown {unknown} def
papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get
end
/FMdicttop countdictstack 1 add def
statusdict begin stopped end
countdictstack -1 FMdicttop {pop end} for
} def
/manualpapersize {
papersizedict begin
/Letter {letter} def
/LetterSmall {lettersmall} def
/Tabloid {11x17} def
/Ledger {ledger} def
/Legal {legal} def
/Statement {statement} def
/Executive {executive} def
/A3 {a3} def
/A4 {a4} def
/A4Small {a4small} def
/B4 {b4} def
/B5 {b5} def
/unknown {unknown} def
papersizedict dup papername known {papername} {/unknown} ifelse get
end
stopped
} def
/desperatepapersize {
statusdict /setpageparams known
{
paperwidth paperheight 0 1
statusdict begin
{setpageparams} stopped pop
end
} if
} def
/savematrix {
orgmatrix currentmatrix pop
} bind def
/restorematrix {
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
310 311 312 313 314 315 316 | /fraction /currency /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright /fi /fl /daggerdbl /periodcentered /quotesinglbase /quotedblbase /perthousand /Acircumflex /Ecircumflex /Aacute /Edieresis /Egrave /Iacute /Icircumflex /Idieresis /Igrave /Oacute /Ocircumflex /.notdef /Ograve /Uacute /Ucircumflex /Ugrave /dotlessi /circumflex /tilde /macron /breve /dotaccent /ring /cedilla /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron ] def | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 |
/fraction /currency /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright /fi /fl /daggerdbl
/periodcentered /quotesinglbase /quotedblbase /perthousand
/Acircumflex /Ecircumflex /Aacute /Edieresis /Egrave /Iacute
/Icircumflex /Idieresis /Igrave /Oacute /Ocircumflex /.notdef /Ograve
/Uacute /Ucircumflex /Ugrave /dotlessi /circumflex /tilde /macron
/breve /dotaccent /ring /cedilla /hungarumlaut /ogonek /caron
] def
/ReEncode {
dup
length
dict begin
{
1 index /FID ne
{def}
{pop pop} ifelse
} forall
0 eq {/Encoding DiacriticEncoding def} if
currentdict
end
} bind def
/graymode true def
/bwidth FMLOCAL
/bpside FMLOCAL
/bstring FMLOCAL
/onbits FMLOCAL
/offbits FMLOCAL
/xindex FMLOCAL
/yindex FMLOCAL
/x FMLOCAL
/y FMLOCAL
/setpattern {
/bwidth exch def
/bpside exch def
/bstring exch def
/onbits 0 def /offbits 0 def
freq sangle landscape {90 add} if
{/y exch def
/x exch def
/xindex x 1 add 2 div bpside mul cvi def
/yindex y 1 add 2 div bpside mul cvi def
bstring yindex bwidth mul xindex 8 idiv add get
1 7 xindex 8 mod sub bitshift and 0 ne
{/onbits onbits 1 add def 1}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
366 367 368 369 370 371 372 | orgfreq organgle orgproc cvx setscreen } if } bind def /HUE FMLOCAL /SAT FMLOCAL /BRIGHT FMLOCAL /Colors FMLOCAL | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 |
orgfreq organgle orgproc cvx setscreen
} if
} bind def
/HUE FMLOCAL
/SAT FMLOCAL
/BRIGHT FMLOCAL
/Colors FMLOCAL
FMPrintInColor
{
/HUE 0 def
/SAT 0 def
/BRIGHT 0 def
% array of arrays Hue and Sat values for the separations [HUE BRIGHT]
/Colors
[[0 0 ] % black
[0 0 ] % white
[0.00 1.0] % red
[0.37 1.0] % green
[0.60 1.0] % blue
[0.50 1.0] % cyan
[0.83 1.0] % magenta
[0.16 1.0] % comment / yellow
] def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLOR {
BITMAPCOLOR} def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLORc {
BITMAPCOLORc} def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLOR {
BITMAPTRUECOLOR } def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLORc {
BITMAPTRUECOLORc } def
/K {
Colors exch get dup
0 get /HUE exch store
1 get /BRIGHT exch store
HUE 0 eq BRIGHT 0 eq and
{1.0 SAT sub setgray}
{HUE SAT BRIGHT sethsbcolor}
ifelse
} def
/FMsetgray {
/SAT exch 1.0 exch sub store
HUE 0 eq BRIGHT 0 eq and
{1.0 SAT sub setgray}
{HUE SAT BRIGHT sethsbcolor}
ifelse
} bind def
}
{
/BEGINBITMAPCOLOR {
BITMAPGRAY} def
/BEGINBITMAPCOLORc {
BITMAPGRAYc} def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLOR {
BITMAPTRUEGRAY } def
/BEGINBITMAPTRUECOLORc {
BITMAPTRUEGRAYc } def
/FMsetgray {setgray} bind def
/K {
pop
} def
}
ifelse
/normalize {
transform round exch round exch itransform
} bind def
/dnormalize {
dtransform round exch round exch idtransform
} bind def
/lnormalize {
0 dtransform exch cvi 2 idiv 2 mul 1 add exch idtransform pop
} bind def
/H {
lnormalize setlinewidth
} bind def
/Z {
setlinecap
} bind def
/fillvals FMLOCAL
/X {
fillvals exch get
dup type /stringtype eq
{8 1 setpattern}
{grayness}
ifelse
} bind def
/V {
gsave eofill grestore
} bind def
/N {
stroke
} bind def
/M {newpath moveto} bind def
/E {lineto} bind def
/D {curveto} bind def
/O {closepath} bind def
/n FMLOCAL
/L {
/n exch def
newpath
normalize
moveto
2 1 n {pop normalize lineto} for
} bind def
/Y {
L
closepath
} bind def
/x1 FMLOCAL
/x2 FMLOCAL
/y1 FMLOCAL
/y2 FMLOCAL
/rad FMLOCAL
/R {
/y2 exch def
/x2 exch def
/y1 exch def
/x1 exch def
x1 y1
x2 y1
x2 y2
x1 y2
4 Y
} bind def
/RR {
/rad exch def
normalize
/y2 exch def
/x2 exch def
normalize
/y1 exch def
/x1 exch def
newpath
x1 y1 rad add moveto
x1 y2 x2 y2 rad arcto
x2 y2 x2 y1 rad arcto
x2 y1 x1 y1 rad arcto
x1 y1 x1 y2 rad arcto
closepath
16 {pop} repeat
} bind def
/C {
grestore
gsave
R
clip
} bind def
/FMpointsize FMLOCAL
/F {
FMfonts exch get
FMpointsize scalefont
setfont
} bind def
/Q {
/FMpointsize exch def
F
} bind def
/T {
moveto show
} bind def
/RF {
rotate
0 ne {-1 1 scale} if
} bind def
/TF {
gsave
moveto
RF
show
grestore
} bind def
/P {
moveto
0 32 3 2 roll widthshow
} bind def
/PF {
gsave
moveto
RF
0 32 3 2 roll widthshow
grestore
} bind def
/S {
moveto
0 exch ashow
} bind def
/SF {
gsave
moveto
RF
0 exch ashow
grestore
} bind def
/B {
moveto
0 32 4 2 roll 0 exch awidthshow
} bind def
/BF {
gsave
moveto
RF
0 32 4 2 roll 0 exch awidthshow
grestore
} bind def
/G {
gsave
newpath
normalize translate 0.0 0.0 moveto
dnormalize scale
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 3 roll arc
closepath fill
grestore
} bind def
/A {
gsave
savematrix
newpath
2 index 2 div add exch 3 index 2 div sub exch
normalize 2 index 2 div sub exch 3 index 2 div add exch
translate
scale
0.0 0.0 1.0 5 3 roll arc
restorematrix
stroke
grestore
} bind def
/x FMLOCAL
/y FMLOCAL
/w FMLOCAL
/h FMLOCAL
/xx FMLOCAL
/yy FMLOCAL
/ww FMLOCAL
/hh FMLOCAL
/FMsaveobject FMLOCAL
/FMoptop FMLOCAL
/FMdicttop FMLOCAL
/BEGINPRINTCODE {
/FMdicttop countdictstack 1 add def
/FMoptop count 4 sub def
/FMsaveobject save def
userdict begin
/showpage {} def
FMNORMALIZEGRAPHICS
3 index neg 3 index neg translate
} bind def
/ENDPRINTCODE {
count -1 FMoptop {pop pop} for
countdictstack -1 FMdicttop {pop end} for
FMsaveobject restore
} bind def
/gn {
0
{ 46 mul
cf read pop
32 sub
dup 46 lt {exit} if
46 sub add
} loop
add
} bind def
/str FMLOCAL
/cfs {
/str sl string def
0 1 sl 1 sub {str exch val put} for
str def
} bind def
/ic [
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0223
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0223
0
{0 hx} {1 hx} {2 hx} {3 hx} {4 hx} {5 hx} {6 hx} {7 hx} {8 hx} {9 hx}
{10 hx} {11 hx} {12 hx} {13 hx} {14 hx} {15 hx} {16 hx} {17 hx} {18 hx}
{19 hx} {gn hx} {0} {1} {2} {3} {4} {5} {6} {7} {8} {9} {10} {11} {12}
{13} {14} {15} {16} {17} {18} {19} {gn} {0 wh} {1 wh} {2 wh} {3 wh}
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
651 652 653 654 655 656 657 | /val FMLOCAL /ws FMLOCAL /im FMLOCAL /bs FMLOCAL /cs FMLOCAL /len FMLOCAL /pos FMLOCAL | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 |
/val FMLOCAL
/ws FMLOCAL
/im FMLOCAL
/bs FMLOCAL
/cs FMLOCAL
/len FMLOCAL
/pos FMLOCAL
/ms {
/sl exch def
/val 255 def
/ws cfs
/im cfs
/val 0 def
/bs cfs
/cs cfs
} bind def
400 ms
/ip {
is
0
cf cs readline pop
{ ic exch get exec
add
} forall
pop
} bind def
/wh {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
ws 0 len getinterval im pos len getinterval copy pop
pos len
} bind def
/bl {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
bs 0 len getinterval im pos len getinterval copy pop
pos len
} bind def
/s1 1 string def
/fl {
/len exch def
/pos exch def
/val cf s1 readhexstring pop 0 get def
pos 1 pos len add 1 sub {im exch val put} for
pos len
} bind def
/hx {
3 copy getinterval
cf exch readhexstring pop pop
} bind def
/h FMLOCAL
/w FMLOCAL
/d FMLOCAL
/lb FMLOCAL
/bitmapsave FMLOCAL
/is FMLOCAL
/cf FMLOCAL
/wbytes {
dup
8 eq {pop} {1 eq {7 add 8 idiv} {3 add 4 idiv} ifelse} ifelse
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPBWc {
1 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPGRAYc {
8 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAP2BITc {
2 {} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/COMMONBITMAPc {
/r exch def
/d exch def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/lb w d wbytes def
sl lb lt {lb ms} if
/bitmapsave save def
r
/is im 0 lb getinterval def
ws 0 lb getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPBW {
1 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAPGRAY {
8 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BEGINBITMAP2BIT {
2 {} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/COMMONBITMAP {
/r exch def
/d exch def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
r
/is w d wbytes string def
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{cf is readhexstring pop} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/proc1 FMLOCAL
/proc2 FMLOCAL
/newproc FMLOCAL
/Fmcc {
/proc2 exch cvlit def
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
809 810 811 812 813 814 815 |
setcolortransfer
{pop 0} setundercolorremoval
{} setblackgeneration
} bind def
/tran FMLOCAL
/fakecolorsetup {
/tran 256 string def
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 |
setcolortransfer
{pop 0} setundercolorremoval
{} setblackgeneration
} bind def
/tran FMLOCAL
/fakecolorsetup {
/tran 256 string def
0 1 255 {/indx exch def
tran indx
red indx get 77 mul
green indx get 151 mul
blue indx get 28 mul
add add 256 idiv put} for
currenttransfer
{255 mul cvi tran exch get 255.0 div}
exch Fmcc settransfer
} bind def
/BITMAPCOLOR {
/d 8 def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
colorsetup
/is w d wbytes string def
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{cf is readhexstring pop} {is} {is} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPCOLORc {
/d 8 def
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/lb w d wbytes def
sl lb lt {lb ms} if
/bitmapsave save def
colorsetup
/is im 0 lb getinterval def
ws 0 lb getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h d [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} {is} {is} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUECOLORc {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
ws 0 w getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip} {gip} {bip} true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUECOLOR {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
/gis w string def
/bis w string def
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ cf is readhexstring pop }
{ cf gis readhexstring pop }
{ cf bis readhexstring pop }
true 3 colorimage
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUEGRAYc {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
ws 0 w getinterval is copy pop
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ip gip bip w gray} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/ww FMLOCAL
/r FMLOCAL
/g FMLOCAL
/b FMLOCAL
/i FMLOCAL
/gray {
/ww exch def
/b exch def
/g exch def
/r exch def
0 1 ww 1 sub { /i exch def r i get .299 mul g i get .587 mul
b i get .114 mul add add r i 3 -1 roll floor cvi put } for
r
} bind def
/BITMAPTRUEGRAY {
gsave
translate rotate scale /h exch def /w exch def
/bitmapsave save def
/is w string def
/gis w string def
/bis w string def
/cf currentfile def
w h 8 [w 0 0 h neg 0 h]
{ cf is readhexstring pop
cf gis readhexstring pop
cf bis readhexstring pop w gray} image
bitmapsave restore
grestore
} bind def
/BITMAPGRAY {
8 {fakecolorsetup} COMMONBITMAP
} bind def
/BITMAPGRAYc {
8 {fakecolorsetup} COMMONBITMAPc
} bind def
/ENDBITMAP {
} bind def
end
/ALDsave FMLOCAL
/ALDmatrix matrix def ALDmatrix currentmatrix pop
/StartALD {
/ALDsave save def
savematrix
ALDmatrix setmatrix
} bind def
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 | -0.27 ( binding, and) 457.95 580 P (a binding on) 152.1 567.89 T 5 F (<Control-a>) 204.57 567.89 T 3 F ( takes precedence over a binding on) 270.54 567.89 T 5 F | | | 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 | -0.27 ( binding, and) 457.95 580 P (a binding on) 152.1 567.89 T 5 F (<Control-a>) 204.57 567.89 T 3 F ( takes precedence over a binding on) 270.54 567.89 T 5 F (<KeyPress>.) 416.24 567.89 T 3 F -0.26 (The mechanism for con\337ict resolution is similar in Tk 4.0 except that one binding can) 170.1 555.89 P -0.35 (trigger for) 152.1 543.78 P 2 F -0.35 (each) 194.7 543.78 P 3 F -0.35 ( binding tag on the window where the event occurs. The bindings trigger in) 213.57 543.78 P |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 | 5 F (Control) 391.17 608.33 T 3 F (, or any combina-) 433.15 608.33 T (tion of them. If you wish for a binding not to trigger when a modi\336er is present, you can) 152.1 596.33 T (just de\336ne an empty binding for that modi\336er combination. For example,) 152.1 584.33 T 5 9 Q | | | | 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 |
5 F
(Control) 391.17 608.33 T
3 F
(, or any combina-) 433.15 608.33 T
(tion of them. If you wish for a binding not to trigger when a modi\336er is present, you can) 152.1 596.33 T
(just de\336ne an empty binding for that modi\336er combination. For example,) 152.1 584.33 T
5 9 Q
(bind .b <Control-ButtonPress-1> {# this script is a no-op}) 179.1 570 T
3 10 Q
(creates a binding that will trigger on mouse button presses when the) 152.1 556.33 T
5 F
(Control) 426.36 556.33 T
3 F
( key is) 468.34 556.33 T
-0.22 (down. If there is also a) 152.1 544.33 P
5 F
-0.52 (<ButtonPress-1>) 244.35 544.33 P
3 F
-0.22 ( binding for) 334.3 544.33 P
5 F
-0.52 (.b) 383.35 544.33 P
3 F
-0.22 (, it will no longer be invoked) 395.34 544.33 P
-0.02 (if the) 152.1 532.33 P
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/tk_mac.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
214 215 216 217 218 219 220 | .SH "ADDITIONAL DIALOGS" .PP The Aqua/Mac OS X defines additional dialogs that applications should support. .TP \fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR . | | | | > > > > | < > > > | 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 | .SH "ADDITIONAL DIALOGS" .PP The Aqua/Mac OS X defines additional dialogs that applications should support. .TP \fB::tk::mac::standardAboutPanel\fR . Brings the standard Cocoa about panel to the front with information filled in from the application bundle files. The panel displays the application icon and the values associated to the info.plist keys named CFBundleName, CFBundleShortVersionString, NSAboutPanelOptionVersion and NSHumanReadableCopyright. If a file named \fICredits.html\fR or \fICredits.rtf\fR exists in the bundle's Resources directory then its contents will be displayed in a scrolling text box at the bottom of the dialog. See the documentation for -[NSApplication orderFrontStandardAboutPanelWithOptions:] for more details. A hook is also provided for a custom About dialog. If a Tcl proc named tkAboutDialog is defined in the main interpreter then that procedure will be called instead of opening the standardAboutPanel. .SH "SYSTEM CONFIGURATION" .PP There are a number of additional global configuration options that control the details of how Tk renders by default. .TP \fB::tk::mac::useCompatibilityMetrics \fIboolean\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/tkvars.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library of Tcl scripts related to Tk. These scripts include an initialization file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up, plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors for widgets. .RS .PP | | | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library of Tcl scripts related to Tk. These scripts include an initialization file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up, plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors for widgets. .RS .PP The initial value of \fBtk_library\fR is set when Tk is added to an interpreter; this is done by searching several different directories until one is found that contains an appropriate Tk startup script. If the \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR environment variable exists, then the directory it names is checked first. If \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR is not set or does not refer to an appropriate directory, then Tk checks several other directories based on a compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory, |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/toplevel.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option except that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background and border. | < < < < < < < < < < < | > > | 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 | .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-background background Background This option is the same as the standard \fB\-background\fR option except that its value may also be specified as an empty string. In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background and border. .OP \-class class Class Specifies a class for the window. This class will be used when querying the option database for the window's other options, and it will also be used later for other purposes such as bindings. Some window managers display the class name for windows in their dock while some others display the window title. The \fB\-class\fR option may not be changed with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. .OP \-colormap colormap Colormap Specifies a colormap to use for the window. The value may be either \fBnew\fR, in which case a new colormap is created for the window and its children, or the name of another window (which must be on the same screen and have the same visual |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 | Specifies the screen on which to place the new window. Any valid screen name may be used, even one associated with a different display. Defaults to the same screen as its parent. This option is special in that it may not be specified via the option database, and it may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. | < < < < < < < < < | 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 | Specifies the screen on which to place the new window. Any valid screen name may be used, even one associated with a different display. Defaults to the same screen as its parent. This option is special in that it may not be specified via the option database, and it may not be modified with the \fBconfigure\fR widget command. .OP \-use use Use This option is used for embedding. If the value is not an empty string, it must be the window identifier of a container window, specified as a hexadecimal string like the ones returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command. The toplevel widget will be created as a child of the given container instead of the root window for the screen. If the container window is in a Tk application, it must be a frame or toplevel widget for |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | path name of the new window. .PP A toplevel is similar to a \fBframe\fR except that it is created as a top-level window: its X parent is the root window of a screen rather than the logical parent from its Tk path name. The primary purpose of a toplevel is to serve as a container for dialog boxes and other collections of widgets. The only visible features | | | | 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 | path name of the new window. .PP A toplevel is similar to a \fBframe\fR except that it is created as a top-level window: its X parent is the root window of a screen rather than the logical parent from its Tk path name. The primary purpose of a toplevel is to serve as a container for dialog boxes and other collections of widgets. The only visible features of a toplevel are its background color and an optional 3-D border to make the toplevel appear raised or sunken. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBtoplevel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the toplevel's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .PP .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE .PP \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the toplevel widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for toplevel widgets: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_button.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | \fBttk::button\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::button\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image, and evaluates a command when pressed. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor | | | 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 | \fBttk::button\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::button\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image, and evaluates a command when pressed. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor \-image \-state \-style \-takefocus \-text \-textvariable \-underline \-width .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-command command Command A script to evaluate when the widget is invoked. .OP \-default default Default |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_combobox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::combobox\fR combines a text field with a pop-down list of values; the user may select the value of the text field from among the values in the list. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus | | | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::combobox\fR combines a text field with a pop-down list of values; the user may select the value of the text field from among the values in the list. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style .SE .\" ALSO: Other entry widget options .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection Boolean value. If set, the widget selection is linked to the X selection. .OP \-justify justify Justify |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
146 147 148 149 150 151 152 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br | < < | 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-postoffset\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .RS Text entry select background. .RE \fB\-selectforeground\fP \fIcolor\fP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_entry.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 | with the \fB\-textvariable\fR option. Entry widgets support horizontal scrolling with the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option and \fBxview\fR widget command. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-font \-foreground \-style | | | 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | with the \fB\-textvariable\fR option. Entry widgets support horizontal scrolling with the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option and \fBxview\fR widget command. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-font \-foreground \-style \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection A boolean value specifying whether or not a selection in the widget should be linked to the X selection. If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
452 453 454 455 456 457 458 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br | < < | 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-relief\fP \fIrelief\fP .br \fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-selectborderwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-selectforeground\fP \fIcolor\fP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_image.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | or vertically (\fB\-sticky ns\fR), subregions of the image are replicated to fill the parcel based on the \fB\-border\fR option. The \fB\-border\fR divides the image into 9 regions: four fixed corners, top and left edges (which may be tiled horizontally), left and right edges (which may be tiled vertically), and the central area (which may be tiled in both directions). .SH "EXAMPLE" .PP .CS set img1 [image create photo \-file button.png] set img2 [image create photo \-file button-pressed.png] set img3 [image create photo \-file button-active.png] | > > > | | 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 |
or vertically (\fB\-sticky ns\fR),
subregions of the image are replicated to fill the parcel
based on the \fB\-border\fR option.
The \fB\-border\fR divides the image into 9 regions:
four fixed corners, top and left edges (which may be tiled horizontally),
left and right edges (which may be tiled vertically),
and the central area (which may be tiled in both directions).
.PP
An image element that is not meant to claim any space (for example when used
as a background image) should use \fB\-width 0\fR and \fB\-height 0\fR.
.SH "EXAMPLE"
.PP
.CS
set img1 [image create photo \-file button.png]
set img2 [image create photo \-file button-pressed.png]
set img3 [image create photo \-file button-active.png]
ttk::style element create Button.button image \e
[list $img1 pressed $img2 active $img3] \e
\-border {2 4} \-sticky we
.CE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::intro(n), ttk::style(n), ttk_vsapi(n), image(n), photo(n)
.SH KEYWORDS
style, theme, appearance, pixmap theme, image
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/ttk_intro.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
117 118 119 120 121 122 123 |
.PP
For example, the class bindings for the \fBttk::button\fR
widget are:
.PP
.CS
bind TButton <Enter> { %W state active }
bind TButton <Leave> { %W state !active }
| | | 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 |
.PP
For example, the class bindings for the \fBttk::button\fR
widget are:
.PP
.CS
bind TButton <Enter> { %W state active }
bind TButton <Leave> { %W state !active }
bind TButton <ButtonPress-1> { %W state pressed }
bind TButton <Button1-Leave> { %W state !pressed }
bind TButton <Button1-Enter> { %W state pressed }
bind TButton <ButtonRelease-1> \e
{ %W instate {pressed} { %W state !pressed ; %W invoke } }
.CE
.PP
This specifies that the widget becomes \fBactive\fR when
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_label.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::label\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image. The label may be linked to a Tcl variable to automatically change the displayed text. .SO ttk_widget | | < | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 | .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::label\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image. The label may be linked to a Tcl variable to automatically change the displayed text. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor \-image \-padding \-state \-style \-takefocus \-text \-textvariable \-underline \-width .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor Specifies how the information in the widget is positioned relative to the inner margins. Legal values are \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, and \fBcenter\fR. See also \fB\-justify\fR. .OP \-background frameColor FrameColor The widget's background color. If unspecified, the theme default is used. .OP \-font font Font Font to use for label text. .OP \-foreground textColor TextColor The widget's foreground color. If unspecified, the theme default is used. .OP \-justify justify Justify If there are multiple lines of text, specifies how the lines are laid out relative to one another. One of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR. See also \fB\-anchor\fR. .OP \-relief relief Relief .\" Rewrite this: Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget border. Valid values are \fBflat\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBraised\fR, \fBridge\fR, \fBsolid\fR, and \fBsunken\fR. .OP \-wraplength wrapLength WrapLength |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_notebook.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
228 229 230 231 232 233 234 | .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-tabmargins\fP \fIpadding\fP .br | | > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 |
.br
\fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP
.br
\fB\-tabmargins\fP \fIpadding\fP
.br
\fB\-tabposition\fP \fIposition\fP
.RS
Specifies the position of the tab row or column as a string of length
1 or 2. The first character indicates the side as \fBn\fP, \fBs\fP,
\fBw\fP, or \fBe\fP, while the second character (if present) is the
sticky bit (specified as \fBw\fP, \fBe\fP, \fBn\fP, or \fBs\fP) within
the tab position. The default position is \fBn\fP for the \fBaqua\fP
theme and \fBnw\fP for all the other built-in themes.
.RE
.br
.PP
\fBTNotebook.Tab\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP
are:
.PP
\fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-bordercolor\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-compound\fP \fIcompound\fP
.br
\fB\-expand\fP \fIpadding\fP
.RS
Defines how much the tab grows in size. Usually used with the
\fBselected\fP dynamic state. \fB\-tabmargins\fP should be
set appropriately so that there is room for the tab growth.
For example, the Ttk library file \fBvistaTheme.tcl\fP contains
the lines
.CS
ttk::style configure TNotebook -tabmargins {2 2 2 0}
ttk::style map TNotebook.Tab -expand {selected {2 2 2 2}}
.CE
which are valid for the default value \fBnw\fP of the \fB\-tabposition\fP
style option. For a \fBttk::notebook\fP style \fBnbStyle\fP defined by
.CS
set nbStyle SW.TNotebook
ttk::style configure $nbStyle -tabposition sw
.CE
you will have to adapt the above settings as follows:
.CS
ttk::style configure $nbStyle -tabmargins {2 0 2 2}
ttk::style map $nbStyle.Tab -expand {selected {2 2 2 2}}
.CE
.RE
\fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP
.br
\fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP
.br
\fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP
.RS
Some themes (e.g., \fBclam\fP) use a different \fIpadding\fP for the
selected tab. For example, the Ttk library file \fBclamTheme.tcl\fP
contains the lines
.CS
ttk::style configure TNotebook.Tab -padding {6 2 6 2}
ttk::style map TNotebook.Tab -padding {selected {6 4 6 2}}
.CE
which are valid for the default value \fBnw\fP of the \fB\-tabposition\fP
style option. Again, for a different tab position you will have to adapt
the above settings accordingly.
.RE
.PP
Some options are only available for specific themes.
.PP
See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure
ttk styles.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
ttk::widget(n), grid(n)
.SH "KEYWORDS"
pane, tab
'\" Local Variables:
'\" mode: nroff
'\" End:
|
Changes to doc/ttk_progressbar.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::progressbar\fR widget shows the status of a long-running operation. They can operate in two modes: \fIdeterminate\fR mode shows the amount completed relative to the total amount of work to be done, and \fIindeterminate\fR mode provides an animated display to let the user know that something is happening. | < < < < < < | | < | < | 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 | .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A \fBttk::progressbar\fR widget shows the status of a long-running operation. They can operate in two modes: \fIdeterminate\fR mode shows the amount completed relative to the total amount of work to be done, and \fIindeterminate\fR mode provides an animated display to let the user know that something is happening. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-length length Length Specifies the length of the long axis of the progress bar (width if horizontal, height if vertical). .OP \-maximum maximum Maximum A floating point number specifying the maximum \fB\-value\fR. Defaults to 100. .OP \-mode mode Mode One of \fBdeterminate\fR or \fBindeterminate\fR. .OP \-orient orient Orient One of \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_scale.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 | is omitted. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::scale\fP is \fBTScale\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP. .PP | | | 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 | is omitted. .SH "STYLING OPTIONS" .PP The class name for a \fBttk::scale\fP is \fBTScale\fP. .PP Dynamic states: \fBactive\fP. .PP \fBTScale\fP styling options configurable with \fBttk::style\fP are: .PP \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-borderwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-darkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_scrollbar.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 | The widget should adjust its view so that the point given by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget. If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333 refers to a point one-third of the way through the document, and so on. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages. It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there is a slight overlap between the old and new views. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should become visible. | > > > > > > > > < < < < < < < < | 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 | The widget should adjust its view so that the point given by \fIfraction\fR appears at the beginning of the widget. If \fIfraction\fR is 0 it refers to the beginning of the document. 1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333 refers to a point one-third of the way through the document, and so on. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBunits\fR The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR units. The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget, such as characters or lines in a text widget. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off the top or left of the window, or \-1, which means that one unit should scroll off the bottom or right of the window. .TP \fIprefix \fBscroll \fInumber \fBpages\fR The widget should adjust its view by \fInumber\fR pages. It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page; typically it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there is a slight overlap between the old and new views. \fINumber\fR is either 1, which means the next page should become visible, or \-1, which means that the previous page should become visible. .SH "WIDGET STATES" .PP The scrollbar automatically sets the \fBdisabled\fR state bit. when the entire range is visible (range is 0.0 to 1.0), and clears it otherwise. It also sets the \fBactive\fR and \fBpressed\fR state flags of individual elements, based on the position and state of the mouse pointer. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_spinbox.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 | up and down buttons that are used to either modify a numeric value or to select among a set of values. The widget implements all the features of the \fBttk::entry\fR widget including support of the \fB\-textvariable\fR option to link the value displayed by the widget to a Tcl variable. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-state \-style | | | 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 | up and down buttons that are used to either modify a numeric value or to select among a set of values. The widget implements all the features of the \fBttk::entry\fR widget including support of the \fB\-textvariable\fR option to link the value displayed by the widget to a Tcl variable. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-state \-style \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand .SE .SO ttk_entry \-validate \-validatecommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-command command Command Specifies a Tcl command to be invoked whenever a spinbutton is invoked. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br | < < | 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 | .br \fB\-insertwidth\fP \fIamount\fP .br \fB\-lightcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-padding\fP \fIpadding\fP .br \fB\-selectbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-selectforeground\fP \fIcolor\fP .PP Some options are only available for specific themes. .PP See the \fBttk::style\fP manual page for information on how to configure |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_treeview.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
340 341 342 343 344 345 346 | .TP \fIpathname \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR? Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag \fIargs...\fR .RS .TP | < < < < < | | < < < < < < > > > > > | 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 | .TP \fIpathname \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR? Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag \fIargs...\fR .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBtag bind \fItagName \fR?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIscript\fR? Add a Tk binding script for the event sequence \fIsequence\fR to the tag \fItagName\fR. When an X event is delivered to an item, binding scripts for each of the item's \fB\-tags\fR are evaluated in order as per \fIbindtags(n)\fR. .RS .PP \fB<KeyPress>\fR, \fB<KeyRelease>\fR, and virtual events are sent to the focus item. \fB<ButtonPress>\fR, \fB<ButtonRelease>\fR, and \fB<Motion>\fR events are sent to the item under the mouse pointer. No other event types are supported. .PP The binding \fIscript\fR undergoes \fB%\fR-substitutions before evaluation; see \fBbind(n)\fR for details. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBtag configure \fItagName\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value...\fR? Query or modify the options for the specified \fItagName\fR. If one or more \fIoption/value\fR pairs are specified, sets the value of those options for the specified tag. If a single \fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that option (or the empty string if the option has not been specified for \fItagName\fR). With no additional arguments, returns a dictionary of the option settings for \fItagName\fR. See \fBTAG OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag has \fItagName\fR ?\fIitem\fR? If \fIitem\fR is specified, returns 1 or 0 depending on whether the specified item has the named tag. Otherwise, returns a list of all items which have the specified tag. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag names\fR Returns a list of all tags used by the widget. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag add \fItag items\fR Adds the specified \fItag\fR to each of the listed \fIitems\fR. If \fItag\fR is already present for a particular item, then the \fB\-tags\fR for that item are unchanged. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag remove \fItag\fR ?\fIitems\fR? Removes the specified \fItag\fR from each of the listed \fIitems\fR. If \fIitems\fR is omitted, removes \fItag\fR from each item in the tree. If \fItag\fR is not present for a particular item, then the \fB\-tags\fR for that item are unchanged. .RE .PP |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 | then data column \fIn\fR is displayed in display column \fB#\fIn+1\fR. Again, \fBcolumn #0 always refers to the tree column\fR. .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" .PP The treeview widget generates the following virtual events. .IP <<TreeviewSelect>> Generated whenever the selection changes. .IP <<TreeviewOpen>> Generated just before setting the focus item to \fB\-open true\fR. .IP <<TreeviewClose>> Generated just after setting the focus item to \fB\-open false\fR. .PP The \fBfocus\fR and \fBselection\fR widget commands can be used to determine the affected item or items. | > > > | 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 | then data column \fIn\fR is displayed in display column \fB#\fIn+1\fR. Again, \fBcolumn #0 always refers to the tree column\fR. .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" .PP The treeview widget generates the following virtual events. .IP <<TreeviewSelect>> Generated whenever the selection changes. It might also be generated when selection is affected but not actually changed. Further, multiple selection changes could happen before events can be processed leading to multiple events with the same visible selection. .IP <<TreeviewOpen>> Generated just before setting the focus item to \fB\-open true\fR. .IP <<TreeviewClose>> Generated just after setting the focus item to \fB\-open false\fR. .PP The \fBfocus\fR and \fBselection\fR widget commands can be used to determine the affected item or items. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 | \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-rowheight\fP \fIamount\fP .RS The \fB\-rowheight\fP value is not corrected by the \fBtk scaling\fP | > > > > > | | 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 | \fB\-background\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-fieldbackground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP .br \fB\-foreground\fP \fIcolor\fP .br \fB\-indent\fP \fIamount\fP .RS Specifies how many pixels items are indented from their parents. Defaults to 20. .RE .br \fB\-rowheight\fP \fIamount\fP .RS The \fB\-rowheight\fP value is not corrected by the \fBtk scaling\fP value or by the configured font size. It defaults to 20 pixels. Make sure that the \fB\-rowheight\fP is large enough to contain any images. .PP To adjust the \fB\-rowheight\fP for the Treeview style, use the following code after \fBtk scaling\fP has been applied. Note that even if you do not support or change \fBtk scaling\fP in your program, your users may have it set in their .wishrc. .RE |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/ttk_widget.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
67 68 69 70 71 72 73 | .RE .OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand A command prefix, used to communicate with vertical scrollbars. See the description of \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR above for details. .SH "LABEL OPTIONS" The following options are supported by labels, buttons, and other button-like widgets: | < < < < < < | | 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 | .RE .OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand A command prefix, used to communicate with vertical scrollbars. See the description of \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR above for details. .SH "LABEL OPTIONS" The following options are supported by labels, buttons, and other button-like widgets: .OP \-compound compound Compound Specifies how to display the image relative to the text, in the case both \fB\-text\fR and \fB\-image\fR are present. If set to the empty string (the default), the rules described in the "Elements" section of \fIttk::intro(n)\fR explain which value is actually used. The other valid values are: .RS .IP text Display text only. .IP image Display image only. .IP center Display text centered on top of image. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
108 109 110 111 112 113 114 | Specifies an image to display. This is a list of 1 or more elements. The first element is the default image name. The rest of the list is a sequence of \fIstatespec / value\fR pairs as per \fBstyle map\fR, specifying different images to use when the widget is in a particular state or combination of states. All images in the list should have the same size. | < < < < < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 | Specifies an image to display. This is a list of 1 or more elements. The first element is the default image name. The rest of the list is a sequence of \fIstatespec / value\fR pairs as per \fBstyle map\fR, specifying different images to use when the widget is in a particular state or combination of states. All images in the list should have the same size. .OP \-padding padding Padding Specifies the internal padding for the widget. The padding is a list of up to four length specifications \fIleft top right bottom\fR. If fewer than four elements are specified, \fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR, \fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and \fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR. In other words, a list of three numbers specify the left, vertical, and right padding; a list of two numbers specify the horizontal and the vertical padding; a single number specifies the same padding all the way around the widget. .OP \-text text Text Specifies a text string to be displayed inside the widget (unless overridden by \fB\-textvariable\fR). .OP \-textvariable textVariable Variable Specifies the name of a global variable whose value will be used in place of the \fB\-text\fR resource. .OP \-underline underline Underline If set, specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to underline in the text string. The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation. .OP \-width width Width If greater than zero, specifies how much space, in character widths, to allocate for the text label. If less than zero, specifies a minimum width. If zero or unspecified, the natural width of the text label is used. .SH "COMPATIBILITY OPTIONS" This option is only available for themed widgets that have .QW corresponding traditional Tk widgets. .OP \-state state State May be set to \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR to control the \fBdisabled\fR state bit. |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
253 254 255 256 257 258 259 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the content appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. | | < | | > < < | 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 | Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the content appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. '\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fIargs\fR This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the content in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
295 296 297 298 299 300 301 | way through the content appears at the top edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. | | | > < < | 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 | way through the content appears at the top edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. '\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then items farther to the top become visible; if it is positive then items farther to the bottom become visible. .RE .SH "WIDGET STATES" The widget state is a bitmap of independent state flags. Widget state flags include: .TP \fBactive\fR . |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/winfo.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME winfo \- Return window-related information .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME winfo \- Return window-related information .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwinfo\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBwinfo\fR command is used to retrieve information about windows managed by Tk. It can take any of a number of different forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are: .TP |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/wish.1.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 | .TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wish \- Simple windowing shell .SH SYNOPSIS | | | 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 | .TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications" .so man.macros .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wish \- Simple windowing shell .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwish\fR ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg arg ...\fR? .SH OPTIONS .IP "\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR" 20 Specifies the encoding of the text stored in \fIfileName\fR. This option is only recognized prior to the \fIfileName\fR argument. .IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20 Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of using the default colormap for the screen. |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to doc/wm.n.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
116 117 118 119 120 121 122 | Makes the window content area transparent and turns off the window shadow. For the transparency to be effective, the toplevel background needs to be set to a color with some alpha, e.g. .QW systemTransparent . .PP On X11, the following attributes may be set. These are not supported by all window managers, and will have no effect under older WMs. | | | 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 | Makes the window content area transparent and turns off the window shadow. For the transparency to be effective, the toplevel background needs to be set to a color with some alpha, e.g. .QW systemTransparent . .PP On X11, the following attributes may be set. These are not supported by all window managers, and will have no effect under older WMs. .\" See https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/wm-spec/ .TP \fB\-type\fR .VS 8.6 Requests that the window should be interpreted by the window manager as being of the specified type(s). This may cause the window to be decorated in a different way or otherwise managed differently, though exactly what happens is entirely up to the window manager. A list of types may be used, in order of |
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
603 604 605 606 607 608 609 | as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR. Tk will automatically set the position source to \fBuser\fR when a \fBwm geometry\fR command is invoked, unless the source has been set explicitly to \fBprogram\fR. .TP \fBwm protocol \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR? . | | < | | | < < > > | | | > | | | | > | | < | | | < | > > | > > | > > > > | > > | > > | > | > | 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 | as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR. Tk will automatically set the position source to \fBuser\fR when a \fBwm geometry\fR command is invoked, unless the source has been set explicitly to \fBprogram\fR. .TP \fBwm protocol \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR? . This command is used to manage window manager protocols. The \fIname\fR argument in the \fBwm protocol\fR command is the name of an atom corresponding to a window manager protocol. Examples include \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR or \fBWM_SAVE_YOURSELF\fR or \fBWM_TAKE_FOCUS\fR. .RS .PP A \fIwindow manager protocol\fR is a class of messages sent from a window manager to a Tk application outside of the normal event processing system. The main example is the \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR protocol; these messages are sent when the user clicks the close widget in the title bar of a window. Handlers for window manager protocols are installed with the \fBwm protocol\fR command. As a rule, if no handler has been installed for a protocol by the \fBwm protocol\fR command then all messages of that protocol are ignored. The \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR protocol is an exception to this rule. At start-up Tk installs a handler for this protocol, which responds by destroying the window. The \fBwm protocol\fR command can be used to replace this default handler by one which responds differently. .RE .RS .PP The list of available window manager protocols depends on the window manager, but all window managers supported by Tk provide \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR. On the Windows platform, a \fBWM_SAVE_YOURSELF\fR message is sent on user logout or system restart. .RE .RS .PP If both \fIname\fR and \fIcommand\fR are specified, then \fIcommand\fR becomes the handler for the protocol specified by \fIname\fR. The atom for \fIname\fR will be added to \fIwindow\fR's \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property to tell the window manager that the application has a handler for the protocol specified by \fIname\fR, and \fIcommand\fR will be invoked in the future whenever the window manager sends a message of that protocol to the Tk application. In this case the \fBwm protocol\fR command returns an empty string. If \fIname\fR is specified but \fIcommand\fR is not, then the current handler for \fIname\fR is returned, or an empty string if there is no handler defined for \fIname\fR (as a special case, the default handler for \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR is not returned). If \fIcommand\fR is specified as an empty string then the atom for \fIname\fR is removed from the \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property of \fIwindow\fR and the handler is destroyed; an empty string is returned. Lastly, if neither \fIname\fR nor \fIcommand\fR is specified, the \fBwm protocol\fR command returns a list of all of the protocols for which handlers are currently defined for \fIwindow\fR. .RE .TP \fBwm resizable \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR? . This command controls whether or not the user may interactively resize a top-level window. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they are boolean values that determine whether the |
| ︙ | ︙ |
Changes to generic/ks_names.h.
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 |
{ "Linefeed", 0xFF0A },
{ "Clear", 0xFF0B },
{ "Return", 0xFF0D },
{ "Pause", 0xFF13 },
{ "Scroll_Lock", 0xFF14 },
{ "Sys_Req", 0xFF15 },
{ "Escape", 0xFF1B },
| < < < < < > > > > > > | > > > > > | | > | 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 |
{ "Linefeed", 0xFF0A },
{ "Clear", 0xFF0B },
{ "Return", 0xFF0D },
{ "Pause", 0xFF13 },
{ "Scroll_Lock", 0xFF14 },
{ "Sys_Req", 0xFF15 },
{ "Escape", 0xFF1B },
{ "Multi_key", 0xFF20 },
{ "Kanji", 0xFF21 },
{ "Muhenkan", 0xFF22 },
{ "Henkan_Mode", 0xFF23 },
{ "Henkan", 0xFF23 },
{ "Romaji", 0xFF24 },
{ "Hiragana", 0xFF25 },
{ "Katakana", 0xFF26 },
{ "Hiragana_Katakana", 0xFF27 },
{ "Zenkaku", 0xFF28 },
{ "Hankaku", 0xFF29 },
{ "Zenkaku_Hankaku", 0xFF2A },
{ "Touroku", 0xFF2B },
{ "Massyo", 0xFF2C },
{ "Kana_Lock", 0xFF2D },
{ "Kana_Shift", 0xFF2E },
{ "Eisu_Shift", 0xFF2F },
{ "Eisu_toggle", 0xFF30 },
{ "Hangul", 0xFF31 },
{ "Hangul_Start", 0xFF32 },
{ "Hangul_End", 0xFF33 },
{ "Hangul_Hanja", 0xFF34 },
{ "Hangul_Jamo", 0xFF35 },
{ "Hangul_Romaja", 0xFF36 },
{ "Codeinput", 0xFF37 },
{ "Hangul_Jeonja", 0xFF38 },
{ "Hangul_Banja", 0xFF39 },
{ "Hangul_PreHanja", 0xFF3A },
{ "Hangul_PostHanja", 0xFF3B },
{ "SingleCandidate", 0xFF3C },
{ "MultipleCandidate", 0xFF3D },
{ "PreviousCandidate", 0xFF3E },
{ "Hangul_Special", 0xFF3F },
{ "Home", 0xFF50 },
{ "Left", 0xFF51 },
{ "Up", 0xFF52 },
{ "Right", 0xFF53 },
{ "Down", 0xFF54 },
{ "Prior", 0xFF55 },
{ "Page_Up", 0xFF55 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 |
{ "Menu", 0xFF67 },
{ "Find", 0xFF68 },
{ "Cancel", 0xFF69 },
{ "Help", 0xFF6A },
{ "Break", 0xFF6B },
{ "Mode_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "script_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Num_Lock", 0xFF7F },
{ "KP_Space", 0xFF80 },
{ "KP_Tab", 0xFF89 },
{ "KP_Enter", 0xFF8D },
{ "KP_F1", 0xFF91 },
{ "KP_F2", 0xFF92 },
{ "KP_F3", 0xFF93 },
| > > > > | 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 |
{ "Menu", 0xFF67 },
{ "Find", 0xFF68 },
{ "Cancel", 0xFF69 },
{ "Help", 0xFF6A },
{ "Break", 0xFF6B },
{ "Mode_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "script_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "kana_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Arabic_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Greek_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Hebrew_switch", 0xFF7E },
{ "Num_Lock", 0xFF7F },
{ "KP_Space", 0xFF80 },
{ "KP_Tab", 0xFF89 },
{ "KP_Enter", 0xFF8D },
{ "KP_F1", 0xFF91 },
{ "KP_F2", 0xFF92 },
{ "KP_F3", 0xFF93 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 |
{ "KP_Page_Up", 0xFF9A },
{ "KP_Next", 0xFF9B },
{ "KP_Page_Down", 0xFF9B },
{ "KP_End", 0xFF9C },
{ "KP_Begin", 0xFF9D },
{ "KP_Insert", 0xFF9E },
{ "KP_Delete", 0xFF9F },
| < > | 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 |
{ "KP_Page_Up", 0xFF9A },
{ "KP_Next", 0xFF9B },
{ "KP_Page_Down", 0xFF9B },
{ "KP_End", 0xFF9C },
{ "KP_Begin", 0xFF9D },
{ "KP_Insert", 0xFF9E },
{ "KP_Delete", 0xFF9F },
{ "KP_Multiply", 0xFFAA },
{ "KP_Add", 0xFFAB },
{ "KP_Separator", 0xFFAC },
{ "KP_Subtract", 0xFFAD },
{ "KP_Decimal", 0xFFAE },
{ "KP_Divide", 0xFFAF },
{ "KP_0", 0xFFB0 },
{ "KP_1", 0xFFB1 },
{ "KP_2", 0xFFB2 },
{ "KP_3", 0xFFB3 },
{ "KP_4", 0xFFB4 },
{ "KP_5", 0xFFB5 },
{ "KP_6", 0xFFB6 },
{ "KP_7", 0xFFB7 },
{ "KP_8", 0xFFB8 },
{ "KP_9", 0xFFB9 },
{ "KP_Equal", 0xFFBD },
{ "F1", 0xFFBE },
{ "F2", 0xFFBF },
{ "F3", 0xFFC0 },
{ "F4", 0xFFC1 },
{ "F5", 0xFFC2 },
{ "F6", 0xFFC3 },
{ "F7", 0xFFC4 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 |
{ "Meta_R", 0xFFE8 },
{ "Alt_L", 0xFFE9 },
{ "Alt_R", 0xFFEA },
{ "Super_L", 0xFFEB },
{ "Super_R", 0xFFEC },
{ "Hyper_L", 0xFFED },
{ "Hyper_R", 0xFFEE },
{ "ISO_Lock", 0xFE01 },
{ "ISO_Level2_Latch", 0xFE02 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Shift", 0xFE03 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Latch", 0xFE04 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Lock", 0xFE05 },
| > > > > > > > > > > > < < < < > > > | 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 |
{ "Meta_R", 0xFFE8 },
{ "Alt_L", 0xFFE9 },
{ "Alt_R", 0xFFEA },
{ "Super_L", 0xFFEB },
{ "Super_R", 0xFFEC },
{ "Hyper_L", 0xFFED },
{ "Hyper_R", 0xFFEE },
{ "braille_dot_1", 0xFFF1 },
{ "braille_dot_2", 0xFFF2 },
{ "braille_dot_3", 0xFFF3 },
{ "braille_dot_4", 0xFFF4 },
{ "braille_dot_5", 0xFFF5 },
{ "braille_dot_6", 0xFFF6 },
{ "braille_dot_7", 0xFFF7 },
{ "braille_dot_8", 0xFFF8 },
{ "braille_dot_9", 0xFFF9 },
{ "braille_dot_10", 0xFFFA },
{ "Delete", 0xFFFF },
{ "ISO_Lock", 0xFE01 },
{ "ISO_Level2_Latch", 0xFE02 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Shift", 0xFE03 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Latch", 0xFE04 },
{ "ISO_Level3_Lock", 0xFE05 },
{ "ISO_Group_Latch", 0xFE06 },
{ "ISO_Group_Lock", 0xFE07 },
{ "ISO_Next_Group", 0xFE08 },
{ "ISO_Next_Group_Lock", 0xFE09 },
{ "ISO_Prev_Group", 0xFE0A },
{ "ISO_Prev_Group_Lock", 0xFE0B },
{ "ISO_First_Group", 0xFE0C },
{ "ISO_First_Group_Lock", 0xFE0D },
{ "ISO_Last_Group", 0xFE0E },
{ "ISO_Last_Group_Lock", 0xFE0F },
{ "ISO_Level5_Shift", 0xFE11 },
{ "ISO_Level5_Latch", 0xFE12 },
{ "ISO_Level5_Lock", 0xFE13 },
{ "ISO_Left_Tab", 0xFE20 },
{ "ISO_Move_Line_Up", 0xFE21 },
{ "ISO_Move_Line_Down", 0xFE22 },
{ "ISO_Partial_Line_Up", 0xFE23 },
{ "ISO_Partial_Line_Down", 0xFE24 },
{ "ISO_Partial_Space_Left", 0xFE25 },
{ "ISO_Partial_Space_Right", 0xFE26 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
256 257 258 259 260 261 262 |
{ "dead_belowcircumflex", 0xFE69 },
{ "dead_belowtilde", 0xFE6A },
{ "dead_belowbreve", 0xFE6B },
{ "dead_belowdiaeresis", 0xFE6C },
{ "dead_invertedbreve", 0xFE6D },
{ "dead_belowcomma", 0xFE6E },
{ "dead_currency", 0xFE6F },
| | > > | > > > > | | > > > > > > > > > > > < < < < < < < < < < < | 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 |
{ "dead_belowcircumflex", 0xFE69 },
{ "dead_belowtilde", 0xFE6A },
{ "dead_belowbreve", 0xFE6B },
{ "dead_belowdiaeresis", 0xFE6C },
{ "dead_invertedbreve", 0xFE6D },
{ "dead_belowcomma", 0xFE6E },
{ "dead_currency", 0xFE6F },
{ "AccessX_Enable", 0xFE70 },
{ "AccessX_Feedback_Enable", 0xFE71 },
{ "RepeatKeys_Enable", 0xFE72 },
{ "SlowKeys_Enable", 0xFE73 },
{ "BounceKeys_Enable", 0xFE74 },
{ "StickyKeys_Enable", 0xFE75 },
{ "MouseKeys_Enable", 0xFE76 },
{ "MouseKeys_Accel_Enable", 0xFE77 },
{ "Overlay1_Enable", 0xFE78 },
{ "Overlay2_Enable", 0xFE79 },
{ "AudibleBell_Enable", 0xFE7A },
{ "dead_a", 0xFE80 },
{ "dead_A", 0xFE81 },
{ "dead_e", 0xFE82 },
{ "dead_E", 0xFE83 },
{ "dead_i", 0xFE84 },
{ "dead_I", 0xFE85 },
{ "dead_o", 0xFE86 },
{ "dead_O", 0xFE87 },
{ "dead_u", 0xFE88 },
{ "dead_U", 0xFE89 },
{ "dead_small_schwa", 0xFE8A },
{ "dead_capital_schwa", 0xFE8B },
{ "dead_greek", 0xFE8C },
{ "dead_lowline", 0xFE90 },
{ "dead_aboveverticalline", 0xFE91 },
{ "dead_belowverticalline", 0xFE92 },
{ "dead_longsolidusoverlay", 0xFE93 },
{ "ch", 0xFEA0 },
{ "Ch", 0xFEA1 },
{ "CH", 0xFEA2 },
{ "c_h", 0xFEA3 },
{ "C_h", 0xFEA4 },
{ "C_H", 0xFEA5 },
{ "First_Virtual_Screen", 0xFED0 },
{ "Prev_Virtual_Screen", 0xFED1 },
{ "Next_Virtual_Screen", 0xFED2 },
{ "Last_Virtual_Screen", 0xFED4 },
{ "Terminate_Server", 0xFED5 },
{ "Pointer_Left", 0xFEE0 },
{ "Pointer_Right", 0xFEE1 },
{ "Pointer_Up", 0xFEE2 },
{ "Pointer_Down", 0xFEE3 },
{ "Pointer_UpLeft", 0xFEE4 },
{ "Pointer_UpRight", 0xFEE5 },
{ "Pointer_DownLeft", 0xFEE6 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
314 315 316 317 318 319 320 |
{ "Pointer_DblClick4", 0xFEF2 },
{ "Pointer_DblClick5", 0xFEF3 },
{ "Pointer_Drag_Dflt", 0xFEF4 },
{ "Pointer_Drag1", 0xFEF5 },
{ "Pointer_Drag2", 0xFEF6 },
{ "Pointer_Drag3", 0xFEF7 },
{ "Pointer_Drag4", 0xFEF8 },
| < | < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 |
{ "Pointer_DblClick4", 0xFEF2 },
{ "Pointer_DblClick5", 0xFEF3 },
{ "Pointer_Drag_Dflt", 0xFEF4 },
{ "Pointer_Drag1", 0xFEF5 },
{ "Pointer_Drag2", 0xFEF6 },
{ "Pointer_Drag3", 0xFEF7 },
{ "Pointer_Drag4", 0xFEF8 },
{ "Pointer_EnableKeys", 0xFEF9 },
{ "Pointer_Accelerate", 0xFEFA },
{ "Pointer_DfltBtnNext", 0xFEFB },
{ "Pointer_DfltBtnPrev", 0xFEFC },
{ "Pointer_Drag5", 0xFEFD },
{ "space", 0x20 },
{ "exclam", 0x21 },
{ "quotedbl", 0x22 },
{ "numbersign", 0x23 },
{ "dollar", 0x24 },
{ "percent", 0x25 },
{ "ampersand", 0x26 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
510 511 512 513 514 515 516 |
{ "Ograve", 0xD2 },
{ "Oacute", 0xD3 },
{ "Ocircumflex", 0xD4 },
{ "Otilde", 0xD5 },
{ "Odiaeresis", 0xD6 },
{ "multiply", 0xD7 },
{ "Oslash", 0xD8 },
| < < | 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 |
{ "Ograve", 0xD2 },
{ "Oacute", 0xD3 },
{ "Ocircumflex", 0xD4 },
{ "Otilde", 0xD5 },
{ "Odiaeresis", 0xD6 },
{ "multiply", 0xD7 },
{ "Oslash", 0xD8 },
{ "Ooblique", 0xD8 },
{ "Ugrave", 0xD9 },
{ "Uacute", 0xDA },
{ "Ucircumflex", 0xDB },
{ "Udiaeresis", 0xDC },
{ "Yacute", 0xDD },
{ "THORN", 0xDE },
{ "Thorn", 0xDE },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
546 547 548 549 550 551 552 |
{ "ograve", 0xF2 },
{ "oacute", 0xF3 },
{ "ocircumflex", 0xF4 },
{ "otilde", 0xF5 },
{ "odiaeresis", 0xF6 },
{ "division", 0xF7 },
{ "oslash", 0xF8 },
| < < < | 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 |
{ "ograve", 0xF2 },
{ "oacute", 0xF3 },
{ "ocircumflex", 0xF4 },
{ "otilde", 0xF5 },
{ "odiaeresis", 0xF6 },
{ "division", 0xF7 },
{ "oslash", 0xF8 },
{ "ugrave", 0xF9 },
{ "uacute", 0xFA },
{ "ucircumflex", 0xFB },
{ "udiaeresis", 0xFC },
{ "yacute", 0xFD },
{ "thorn", 0xFE },
{ "ydiaeresis", 0xFF },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
636 637 638 639 640 641 642 |
{ "cabovedot", 0x2E5 },
{ "ccircumflex", 0x2E6 },
{ "gabovedot", 0x2F5 },
{ "gcircumflex", 0x2F8 },
{ "ubreve", 0x2FD },
{ "scircumflex", 0x2FE },
{ "kra", 0x3A2 },
| < < < < | 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 |
{ "cabovedot", 0x2E5 },
{ "ccircumflex", 0x2E6 },
{ "gabovedot", 0x2F5 },
{ "gcircumflex", 0x2F8 },
{ "ubreve", 0x2FD },
{ "scircumflex", 0x2FE },
{ "kra", 0x3A2 },
{ "kappa", 0x3A2 },
{ "Rcedilla", 0x3A3 },
{ "Itilde", 0x3A5 },
{ "Lcedilla", 0x3A6 },
{ "Emacron", 0x3AA },
{ "Gcedilla", 0x3AB },
{ "Tslash", 0x3AC },
{ "rcedilla", 0x3B3 },
{ "itilde", 0x3B5 },
{ "lcedilla", 0x3B6 },
{ "emacron", 0x3BA },
{ "gcedilla", 0x3BB },
{ "gacute", 0x3BB },
{ "tslash", 0x3BC },
{ "ENG", 0x3BD },
{ "eng", 0x3BF },
{ "Amacron", 0x3C0 },
{ "Iogonek", 0x3C7 },
{ "Eabovedot", 0x3CC },
{ "Imacron", 0x3CF },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
676 677 678 679 680 681 682 |
{ "imacron", 0x3EF },
{ "ncedilla", 0x3F1 },
{ "omacron", 0x3F2 },
{ "kcedilla", 0x3F3 },
{ "uogonek", 0x3F9 },
{ "utilde", 0x3FD },
{ "umacron", 0x3FE },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 |
{ "imacron", 0x3EF },
{ "ncedilla", 0x3F1 },
{ "omacron", 0x3F2 },
{ "kcedilla", 0x3F3 },
{ "uogonek", 0x3F9 },
{ "utilde", 0x3FD },
{ "umacron", 0x3FE },
{ "OE", 0x13BC },
{ "oe", 0x13BD },
{ "Ydiaeresis", 0x13BE },
{ "overline", 0x47E },
{ "kana_fullstop", 0x4A1 },
{ "kana_openingbracket", 0x4A2 },
{ "kana_closingbracket", 0x4A3 },
{ "kana_comma", 0x4A4 },
{ "kana_conjunctive", 0x4A5 },
{ "kana_middledot", 0x4A5 },
{ "kana_WO", 0x4A6 },
{ "kana_a", 0x4A7 },
{ "kana_i", 0x4A8 },
{ "kana_u", 0x4A9 },
{ "kana_e", 0x4AA },
{ "kana_o", 0x4AB },
{ "kana_ya", 0x4AC },
{ "kana_yu", 0x4AD },
{ "kana_yo", 0x4AE },
{ "kana_tsu", 0x4AF },
{ "kana_tu", 0x4AF },
{ "prolongedsound", 0x4B0 },
{ "kana_A", 0x4B1 },
{ "kana_I", 0x4B2 },
{ "kana_U", 0x4B3 },
{ "kana_E", 0x4B4 },
{ "kana_O", 0x4B5 },
{ "kana_KA", 0x4B6 },
{ "kana_KI", 0x4B7 },
{ "kana_KU", 0x4B8 },
{ "kana_KE", 0x4B9 },
{ "kana_KO", 0x4BA },
{ "kana_SA", 0x4BB },
{ "kana_SHI", 0x4BC },
{ "kana_SU", 0x4BD },
{ "kana_SE", 0x4BE },
{ "kana_SO", 0x4BF },
{ "kana_TA", 0x4C0 },
{ "kana_CHI", 0x4C1 },
{ "kana_TI", 0x4C1 },
{ "kana_TSU", 0x4C2 },
{ "kana_TU", 0x4C2 },
{ "kana_TE", 0x4C3 },
{ "kana_TO", 0x4C4 },
{ "kana_NA", 0x4C5 },
{ "kana_NI", 0x4C6 },
{ "kana_NU", 0x4C7 },
{ "kana_NE", 0x4C8 },
{ "kana_NO", 0x4C9 },
{ "kana_HA", 0x4CA },
{ "kana_HI", 0x4CB },
{ "kana_FU", 0x4CC },
{ "kana_HU", 0x4CC },
{ "kana_HE", 0x4CD },
{ "kana_HO", 0x4CE },
{ "kana_MA", 0x4CF },
{ "kana_MI", 0x4D0 },
{ "kana_MU", 0x4D1 },
{ "kana_ME", 0x4D2 },
{ "kana_MO", 0x4D3 },
{ "kana_YA", 0x4D4 },
{ "kana_YU", 0x4D5 },
{ "kana_YO", 0x4D6 },
{ "kana_RA", 0x4D7 },
{ "kana_RI", 0x4D8 },
{ "kana_RU", 0x4D9 },
{ "kana_RE", 0x4DA },
{ "kana_RO", 0x4DB },
{ "kana_WA", 0x4DC },
{ "kana_N", 0x4DD },
{ "voicedsound", 0x4DE },
{ "semivoicedsound", 0x4DF },
{ "Arabic_comma", 0x5AC },
{ "Arabic_semicolon", 0x5BB },
{ "Arabic_question_mark", 0x5BF },
{ "Arabic_hamza", 0x5C1 },
{ "Arabic_maddaonalef", 0x5C2 },
{ "Arabic_hamzaonalef", 0x5C3 },
{ "Arabic_hamzaonwaw", 0x5C4 },
{ "Arabic_hamzaunderalef", 0x5C5 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
850 851 852 853 854 855 856 |
{ "Arabic_feh", 0x5E1 },
{ "Arabic_qaf", 0x5E2 },
{ "Arabic_kaf", 0x5E3 },
{ "Arabic_lam", 0x5E4 },
{ "Arabic_meem", 0x5E5 },
{ "Arabic_noon", 0x5E6 },
{ "Arabic_ha", 0x5E7 },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 |
{ "Arabic_feh", 0x5E1 },
{ "Arabic_qaf", 0x5E2 },
{ "Arabic_kaf", 0x5E3 },
{ "Arabic_lam", 0x5E4 },
{ "Arabic_meem", 0x5E5 },
{ "Arabic_noon", 0x5E6 },
{ "Arabic_ha", 0x5E7 },
{ "Arabic_heh", 0x5E7 },
{ "Arabic_waw", 0x5E8 },
{ "Arabic_alefmaksura", 0x5E9 },
{ "Arabic_yeh", 0x5EA },
{ "Arabic_fathatan", 0x5EB },
{ "Arabic_dammatan", 0x5EC },
{ "Arabic_kasratan", 0x5ED },
{ "Arabic_fatha", 0x5EE },
{ "Arabic_damma", 0x5EF },
{ "Arabic_kasra", 0x5F0 },
{ "Arabic_shadda", 0x5F1 },
{ "Arabic_sukun", 0x5F2 },
{ "Serbian_dje", 0x6A1 },
{ "Macedonia_gje", 0x6A2 },
{ "Cyrillic_io", 0x6A3 },
{ "Ukrainian_ie", 0x6A4 },
{ "Ukranian_je", 0x6A4 },
{ "Macedonia_dse", 0x6A5 },
{ "Ukrainian_i", 0x6A6 },
{ "Ukranian_i", 0x6A6 },
{ "Ukrainian_yi", 0x6A7 },
{ "Ukranian_yi", 0x6A7 },
{ "Cyrillic_je", 0x6A8 },
{ "Serbian_je", 0x6A8 },
{ "Cyrillic_lje", 0x6A9 },
{ "Serbian_lje", 0x6A9 },
{ "Cyrillic_nje", 0x6AA },
{ "Serbian_nje", 0x6AA },
{ "Serbian_tshe", 0x6AB },
{ "Macedonia_kje", 0x6AC },
{ "Ukrainian_ghe_with_upturn", 0x6AD },
{ "Byelorussian_shortu", 0x6AE },
{ "Cyrillic_dzhe", 0x6AF },
{ "Serbian_dze", 0x6AF },
{ "numerosign", 0x6B0 },
{ "Serbian_DJE", 0x6B1 },
{ "Macedonia_GJE", 0x6B2 },
{ "Cyrillic_IO", 0x6B3 },
{ "Ukrainian_IE", 0x6B4 },
{ "Ukranian_JE", 0x6B4 },
{ "Macedonia_DSE", 0x6B5 },
{ "Ukrainian_I", 0x6B6 },
{ "Ukranian_I", 0x6B6 },
{ "Ukrainian_YI", 0x6B7 },
{ "Ukranian_YI", 0x6B7 },
{ "Cyrillic_JE", 0x6B8 },
{ "Serbian_JE", 0x6B8 },
{ "Cyrillic_LJE", 0x6B9 },
{ "Serbian_LJE", 0x6B9 },
{ "Cyrillic_NJE", 0x6BA },
{ "Serbian_NJE", 0x6BA },
{ "Serbian_TSHE", 0x6BB },
{ "Macedonia_KJE", 0x6BC },
{ "Ukrainian_GHE_WITH_UPTURN", 0x6BD },
{ "Byelorussian_SHORTU", 0x6BE },
{ "Cyrillic_DZHE", 0x6BF },
{ "Serbian_DZE", 0x6BF },
{ "Cyrillic_yu", 0x6C0 },
{ "Cyrillic_a", 0x6C1 },
{ "Cyrillic_be", 0x6C2 },
{ "Cyrillic_tse", 0x6C3 },
{ "Cyrillic_de", 0x6C4 },
{ "Cyrillic_ie", 0x6C5 },
{ "Cyrillic_ef", 0x6C6 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 |
{ "Greek_finalsmallsigma", 0x7F3 },
{ "Greek_tau", 0x7F4 },
{ "Greek_upsilon", 0x7F5 },
{ "Greek_phi", 0x7F6 },
{ "Greek_chi", 0x7F7 },
{ "Greek_psi", 0x7F8 },
{ "Greek_omega", 0x7F9 },
| < | 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 |
{ "Greek_finalsmallsigma", 0x7F3 },
{ "Greek_tau", 0x7F4 },
{ "Greek_upsilon", 0x7F5 },
{ "Greek_phi", 0x7F6 },
{ "Greek_chi", 0x7F7 },
{ "Greek_psi", 0x7F8 },
{ "Greek_omega", 0x7F9 },
{ "leftradical", 0x8A1 },
{ "topleftradical", 0x8A2 },
{ "horizconnector", 0x8A3 },
{ "topintegral", 0x8A4 },
{ "botintegral", 0x8A5 },
{ "vertconnector", 0x8A6 },
{ "topleftsqbracket", 0x8A7 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 |
{ "rightshoe", 0xBD8 },
{ "leftshoe", 0xBDA },
{ "lefttack", 0xBDC },
{ "righttack", 0xBFC },
{ "hebrew_doublelowline", 0xCDF },
{ "hebrew_aleph", 0xCE0 },
{ "hebrew_bet", 0xCE1 },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 |
{ "rightshoe", 0xBD8 },
{ "leftshoe", 0xBDA },
{ "lefttack", 0xBDC },
{ "righttack", 0xBFC },
{ "hebrew_doublelowline", 0xCDF },
{ "hebrew_aleph", 0xCE0 },
{ "hebrew_bet", 0xCE1 },
{ "hebrew_beth", 0xCE1 },
{ "hebrew_gimel", 0xCE2 },
{ "hebrew_gimmel", 0xCE2 },
{ "hebrew_dalet", 0xCE3 },
{ "hebrew_daleth", 0xCE3 },
{ "hebrew_he", 0xCE4 },
{ "hebrew_waw", 0xCE5 },
{ "hebrew_zain", 0xCE6 },
{ "hebrew_zayin", 0xCE6 },
{ "hebrew_chet", 0xCE7 },
{ "hebrew_het", 0xCE7 },
{ "hebrew_tet", 0xCE8 },
{ "hebrew_teth", 0xCE8 },
{ "hebrew_yod", 0xCE9 },
{ "hebrew_finalkaph", 0xCEA },
{ "hebrew_kaph", 0xCEB },
{ "hebrew_lamed", 0xCEC },
{ "hebrew_finalmem", 0xCED },
{ "hebrew_mem", 0xCEE },
{ "hebrew_finalnun", 0xCEF },
{ "hebrew_nun", 0xCF0 },
{ "hebrew_samech", 0xCF1 },
{ "hebrew_samekh", 0xCF1 },
{ "hebrew_ayin", 0xCF2 },
{ "hebrew_finalpe", 0xCF3 },
{ "hebrew_pe", 0xCF4 },
{ "hebrew_finalzade", 0xCF5 },
{ "hebrew_finalzadi", 0xCF5 },
{ "hebrew_zade", 0xCF6 },
{ "hebrew_zadi", 0xCF6 },
{ "hebrew_qoph", 0xCF7 },
{ "hebrew_kuf", 0xCF7 },
{ "hebrew_resh", 0xCF8 },
{ "hebrew_shin", 0xCF9 },
{ "hebrew_taw", 0xCFA },
{ "hebrew_taf", 0xCFA },
{ "Thai_kokai", 0xDA1 },
{ "Thai_khokhai", 0xDA2 },
{ "Thai_khokhuat", 0xDA3 },
{ "Thai_khokhwai", 0xDA4 },
{ "Thai_khokhon", 0xDA5 },
{ "Thai_khorakhang", 0xDA6 },
{ "Thai_ngongu", 0xDA7 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 |
{ "Thai_leksam", 0xDF3 },
{ "Thai_leksi", 0xDF4 },
{ "Thai_lekha", 0xDF5 },
{ "Thai_lekhok", 0xDF6 },
{ "Thai_lekchet", 0xDF7 },
{ "Thai_lekpaet", 0xDF8 },
{ "Thai_lekkao", 0xDF9 },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 |
{ "Thai_leksam", 0xDF3 },
{ "Thai_leksi", 0xDF4 },
{ "Thai_lekha", 0xDF5 },
{ "Thai_lekhok", 0xDF6 },
{ "Thai_lekchet", 0xDF7 },
{ "Thai_lekpaet", 0xDF8 },
{ "Thai_lekkao", 0xDF9 },
{ "Hangul_Kiyeog", 0xEA1 },
{ "Hangul_SsangKiyeog", 0xEA2 },
{ "Hangul_KiyeogSios", 0xEA3 },
{ "Hangul_Nieun", 0xEA4 },
{ "Hangul_NieunJieuj", 0xEA5 },
{ "Hangul_NieunHieuh", 0xEA6 },
{ "Hangul_Dikeud", 0xEA7 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 |
{ "Hangul_YeorinHieuh", 0xEF5 },
{ "Hangul_AraeA", 0xEF6 },
{ "Hangul_AraeAE", 0xEF7 },
{ "Hangul_J_PanSios", 0xEF8 },
{ "Hangul_J_KkogjiDalrinIeung", 0xEF9 },
{ "Hangul_J_YeorinHieuh", 0xEFA },
{ "Korean_Won", 0xEFF },
| < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < | 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 |
{ "Hangul_YeorinHieuh", 0xEF5 },
{ "Hangul_AraeA", 0xEF6 },
{ "Hangul_AraeAE", 0xEF7 },
{ "Hangul_J_PanSios", 0xEF8 },
{ "Hangul_J_KkogjiDalrinIeung", 0xEF9 },
{ "Hangul_J_YeorinHieuh", 0xEFA },
{ "Korean_Won", 0xEFF },
{ "XF86ModeLock", 0x1008FF01 },
{ "XF86MonBrightnessUp", 0x1008FF02 },
{ "XF86MonBrightnessDown", 0x1008FF03 },
{ "XF86KbdLightOnOff", 0x1008FF04 },
{ "XF86KbdBrightnessUp", 0x1008FF05 },
{ "XF86KbdBrightnessDown", 0x1008FF06 },
{ "XF86MonBrightnessCycle", 0x1008FF07 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ | |||
2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 |
{ "XF86TouchpadOff", 0x1008FFB1 },
{ "XF86AudioMicMute", 0x1008FFB2 },
{ "XF86Keyboard", 0x1008FFB3 },
{ "XF86WWAN", 0x1008FFB4 },
{ "XF86RFKill", 0x1008FFB5 },
{ "XF86AudioPreset", 0x1008FFB6 },
{ "XF86RotationLockToggle", 0x1008FFB7 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_1", 0x1008FE01 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_2", 0x1008FE02 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_3", 0x1008FE03 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_4", 0x1008FE04 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_5", 0x1008FE05 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_6", 0x1008FE06 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_7", 0x1008FE07 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_8", 0x1008FE08 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_9", 0x1008FE09 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_10", 0x1008FE0A },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_11", 0x1008FE0B },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_12", 0x1008FE0C },
{ "XF86Ungrab", 0x1008FE20 },
{ "XF86ClearGrab", 0x1008FE21 },
{ "XF86Next_VMode", 0x1008FE22 },
{ "XF86Prev_VMode", 0x1008FE23 },
{ "XF86LogWindowTree", 0x1008FE24 },
{ "XF86LogGrabInfo", 0x1008FE25 },
{ "SunFA_Grave", 0x1005FF00 },
{ "SunFA_Circum", 0x1005FF01 },
{ "SunFA_Tilde", 0x1005FF02 },
{ "SunFA_Acute", 0x1005FF03 },
{ "SunFA_Diaeresis", 0x1005FF04 },
{ "SunFA_Cedilla", 0x1005FF05 },
{ "SunF36", 0x1005FF10 },
| > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > | 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 |
{ "XF86TouchpadOff", 0x1008FFB1 },
{ "XF86AudioMicMute", 0x1008FFB2 },
{ "XF86Keyboard", 0x1008FFB3 },
{ "XF86WWAN", 0x1008FFB4 },
{ "XF86RFKill", 0x1008FFB5 },
{ "XF86AudioPreset", 0x1008FFB6 },
{ "XF86RotationLockToggle", 0x1008FFB7 },
{ "XF86FullScreen", 0x1008FFB8 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_1", 0x1008FE01 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_2", 0x1008FE02 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_3", 0x1008FE03 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_4", 0x1008FE04 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_5", 0x1008FE05 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_6", 0x1008FE06 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_7", 0x1008FE07 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_8", 0x1008FE08 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_9", 0x1008FE09 },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_10", 0x1008FE0A },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_11", 0x1008FE0B },
{ "XF86Switch_VT_12", 0x1008FE0C },
{ "XF86Ungrab", 0x1008FE20 },
{ "XF86ClearGrab", 0x1008FE21 },
{ "XF86Next_VMode", 0x1008FE22 },
{ "XF86Prev_VMode", 0x1008FE23 },
{ "XF86LogWindowTree", 0x1008FE24 },
{ "XF86LogGrabInfo", 0x1008FE25 },
{ "XF86BrightnessAuto", 0x100810F4 },
{ "XF86DisplayOff", 0x100810F5 },
{ "XF86Info", 0x10081166 },
{ "XF86AspectRatio", 0x10081177 },
{ "XF86DVD", 0x10081185 },
{ "XF86Audio", 0x10081188 },
{ "XF86ChannelUp", 0x10081192 },
{ "XF86ChannelDown", 0x10081193 },
{ "XF86Break", 0x1008119B },
{ "XF86VideoPhone", 0x100811A0 },
{ "XF86ZoomReset", 0x100811A4 },
{ "XF86Editor", 0x100811A6 },
{ "XF86GraphicsEditor", 0x100811A8 },
{ "XF86Presentation", 0x100811A9 },
{ "XF86Database", 0x100811AA },
{ "XF86Voicemail", 0x100811AC },
{ "XF86Addressbook", 0x100811AD },
{ "XF86DisplayToggle", 0x100811AF },
{ "XF86SpellCheck", 0x100811B0 },
{ "XF86ContextMenu", 0x100811B6 },
{ "XF86MediaRepeat", 0x100811B7 },
{ "XF8610ChannelsUp", 0x100811B8 },
{ "XF8610ChannelsDown", 0x100811B9 },
{ "XF86Images", 0x100811BA },
{ "XF86NotificationCenter", 0x100811BC },
{ "XF86PickupPhone", 0x100811BD },
{ "XF86HangupPhone", 0x100811BE },
{ "XF86Fn", 0x100811D0 },
{ "XF86Fn_Esc", 0x100811D1 },
{ "XF86FnRightShift", 0x100811E5 },
{ "XF86Numeric0", 0x10081200 },
{ "XF86Numeric1", 0x10081201 },
{ "XF86Numeric2", 0x10081202 },
{ "XF86Numeric3", 0x10081203 },
{ "XF86Numeric4", 0x10081204 },
{ "XF86Numeric5", 0x10081205 },
{ "XF86Numeric6", 0x10081206 },
{ "XF86Numeric7", 0x10081207 },
{ "XF86Numeric8", 0x10081208 },
{ "XF86Numeric9", 0x10081209 },
{ "XF86NumericStar", 0x1008120A },
{ "XF86NumericPound", 0x1008120B },
{ "XF86NumericA", 0x1008120C },
{ "XF86NumericB", 0x1008120D },
{ "XF86NumericC", 0x1008120E },
{ "XF86NumericD", 0x1008120F },
{ "XF86CameraFocus", 0x10081210 },
{ "XF86WPSButton", 0x10081211 },
{ "XF86CameraZoomIn", 0x10081215 },
{ "XF86CameraZoomOut", 0x10081216 },
{ "XF86CameraUp", 0x10081217 },
{ "XF86CameraDown", 0x10081218 },
{ "XF86CameraLeft", 0x10081219 },
{ "XF86CameraRight", 0x1008121A },
{ "XF86AttendantOn", 0x1008121B },
{ "XF86AttendantOff", 0x1008121C },
{ "XF86AttendantToggle", 0x1008121D },
{ "XF86LightsToggle", 0x1008121E },
{ "XF86ALSToggle", 0x10081230 },
{ "XF86Buttonconfig", 0x10081240 },
{ "XF86Taskmanager", 0x10081241 },
{ "XF86Journal", 0x10081242 },
{ "XF86ControlPanel", 0x10081243 },
{ "XF86AppSelect", 0x10081244 },
{ "XF86Screensaver", 0x10081245 },
{ "XF86VoiceCommand", 0x10081246 },
{ "XF86Assistant", 0x10081247 },
{ "XF86EmojiPicker", 0x10081249 },
{ "XF86Dictate", 0x1008124A },
{ "XF86BrightnessMin", 0x10081250 },
{ "XF86BrightnessMax", 0x10081251 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistPrev", 0x10081260 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistNext", 0x10081261 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistPrevgroup", 0x10081262 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistNextgroup", 0x10081263 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistAccept", 0x10081264 },
{ "XF86KbdInputAssistCancel", 0x10081265 },
{ "XF86RightUp", 0x10081266 },
{ "XF86RightDown", 0x10081267 },
{ "XF86LeftUp", 0x10081268 },
{ "XF86LeftDown", 0x10081269 },
{ "XF86RootMenu", 0x1008126A },
{ "XF86MediaTopMenu", 0x1008126B },
{ "XF86Numeric11", 0x1008126C },
{ "XF86Numeric12", 0x1008126D },
{ "XF86AudioDesc", 0x1008126E },
{ "XF863DMode", 0x1008126F },
{ "XF86NextFavorite", 0x10081270 },
{ "XF86StopRecord", 0x10081271 },
{ "XF86PauseRecord", 0x10081272 },
{ "XF86VOD", 0x10081273 },
{ "XF86Unmute", 0x10081274 },
{ "XF86FastReverse", 0x10081275 },
{ "XF86SlowReverse", 0x10081276 },
{ "XF86Data", 0x10081277 },
{ "XF86OnScreenKeyboard", 0x10081278 },
{ "XF86PrivacyScreenToggle", 0x10081279 },
{ "XF86SelectiveScreenshot", 0x1008127A },
{ "XF86Macro1", 0x10081290 },
{ "XF86Macro2", 0x10081291 },
{ "XF86Macro3", 0x10081292 },
{ "XF86Macro4", 0x10081293 },
{ "XF86Macro5", 0x10081294 },
{ "XF86Macro6", 0x10081295 },
{ "XF86Macro7", 0x10081296 },
{ "XF86Macro8", 0x10081297 },
{ "XF86Macro9", 0x10081298 },
{ "XF86Macro10", 0x10081299 },
{ "XF86Macro11", 0x1008129A },
{ "XF86Macro12", 0x1008129B },
{ "XF86Macro13", 0x1008129C },
{ "XF86Macro14", 0x1008129D },
{ "XF86Macro15", 0x1008129E },
{ "XF86Macro16", 0x1008129F },
{ "XF86Macro17", 0x100812A0 },
{ "XF86Macro18", 0x100812A1 },
{ "XF86Macro19", 0x100812A2 },
{ "XF86Macro20", 0x100812A3 },
{ "XF86Macro21", 0x100812A4 },
{ "XF86Macro22", 0x100812A5 },
{ "XF86Macro23", 0x100812A6 },
{ "XF86Macro24", 0x100812A7 },
{ "XF86Macro25", 0x100812A8 },
{ "XF86Macro26", 0x100812A9 },
{ "XF86Macro27", 0x100812AA },
{ "XF86Macro28", 0x100812AB },
{ "XF86Macro29", 0x100812AC },
{ "XF86Macro30", 0x100812AD },
{ "XF86MacroRecordStart", 0x100812B0 },
{ "XF86MacroRecordStop", 0x100812B1 },
{ "XF86MacroPresetCycle", 0x100812B2 },
{ "XF86MacroPreset1", 0x100812B3 },
{ "XF86MacroPreset2", 0x100812B4 },
{ "XF86MacroPreset3", 0x100812B5 },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu1", 0x100812B8 },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu2", 0x100812B9 },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu3", 0x100812BA },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu4", 0x100812BB },
{ "XF86KbdLcdMenu5", 0x100812BC },
{ "SunFA_Grave", 0x1005FF00 },
{ "SunFA_Circum", 0x1005FF01 },
{ "SunFA_Tilde", 0x1005FF02 },
{ "SunFA_Acute", 0x1005FF03 },
{ "SunFA_Diaeresis", 0x1005FF04 },
{ "SunFA_Cedilla", 0x1005FF05 },
{ "SunF36", 0x1005FF10 },
|
| ︙ | ︙ |
Deleted generic/nanosvg.h.
|
|